Molded Forms

User's Guide

Version 2016 (11.0)

November 2016
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2016 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2016. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2016 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs
(a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations
("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of
the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the
Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as
guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable
license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for
any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a
modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication
date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Molded Forms User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users
should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE
OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH
CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT
WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER
THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under
the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, ISOGEN, SmartSketch,
SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, Sapphire, and Intergraph Smart are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered
trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a
registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl,
ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are
trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc.
VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2013, All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a
trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.

Molded Forms User's Guide 3

Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 18

What's New in Molded Forms ................................................................................................................... 18

Molded Forms ............................................................................................................................................ 22

Molded Forms Workflow ........................................................................................................................... 28

Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer........................................................................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer .......................................................................................................... 32
Selecting Objects .................................................................................................................................. 40
Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects ....................................................................................... 44
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ...................................................................................... 45
Best Practices ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Bracket Best Practices ................................................................................................................... 50
Knuckle Best Practices ................................................................................................................... 56
Landing Curve Best Practices ........................................................................................................ 56
Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings....................................................................................... 57
Seams Best Practices .................................................................................................................... 60
Session File Best Practices ............................................................................................................ 64
Sketch 2D Best Practices ............................................................................................................... 65
Split Best Practices ......................................................................................................................... 74
Plane Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Define a coincident plane ............................................................................................................... 76
Define an offset plane..................................................................................................................... 77
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector .......................................................................... 78
Define a plane using three points ................................................................................................... 79
Move a defined plane ..................................................................................................................... 80
Boundary Methods ................................................................................................................................ 80
Pick boundaries .............................................................................................................................. 81
Use the Boundary List dialog box ................................................................................................... 81
Define a boundary curve ................................................................................................................ 82
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries ........................................................... 82
Boundary List Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 83
Landing Curve Methods ........................................................................................................................ 87
Define landing curve by 2D ............................................................................................................ 87
Define landing curve by 3D ............................................................................................................ 88
Profile Orientation ................................................................................................................................. 88
Center of Buoyancy .............................................................................................................................. 91
Minimum Distance................................................................................................................................. 92

Placing Plate Systems .............................................................................................................................. 96

Plate System Boundaries ...................................................................................................................... 98
Planar Plate System ............................................................................................................................. 99
Place a planar plate system ......................................................................................................... 104
Modify a plate system ................................................................................................................... 104

Molded Forms User's Guide 4

 Contents

Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy .............................................. 105
Delete a plate system ................................................................................................................... 106
Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 106
Plate Part Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 125
Imported Plate System ........................................................................................................................ 130
Import a plate system ................................................................................................................... 136
Swap hulls .................................................................................................................................... 137
Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 137
Linear Extruded Plate System ............................................................................................................ 156
Place a linear extruded plate system ........................................................................................... 161
Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................. 162
Nonlinear Extruded Plate System ....................................................................................................... 180
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system ..................................................................................... 185
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................ 187
Revolved Plate System ....................................................................................................................... 205
Place a revolved plate system ...................................................................................................... 209
Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................ 210
Bracket Plate System .......................................................................................................................... 227
Create a one support bracket by plane ........................................................................................ 237
Create a two support bracket by plane......................................................................................... 238
Create a three support bracket by plane ...................................................................................... 239
Create a four or five support bracket by plane ............................................................................. 239
Create a two support bracket by supports.................................................................................... 241
Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports ............................................................. 241
Manually select a bracket symbol ................................................................................................ 242
Sketch a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 243
Add reinforcement to a bracket .................................................................................................... 244
Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon browser ........................................... 244
Modify a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 245
Delete a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 245
Bracket by Plane .......................................................................................................................... 246
Bracket by Supports ..................................................................................................................... 247
Bracket System Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 250
Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 271
Define Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................... 272
Advanced Plate System ...................................................................................................................... 275
Modify an advanced plate system ................................................................................................ 281
Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions ....................................................... 282
Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions ....................................................... 282
Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 283
Select Macro Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 408
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................... 408
Child Plate System .............................................................................................................................. 426
Create a child plate system .......................................................................................................... 431
Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 432
Ruled Plate System ............................................................................................................................ 449
Create a ruled plate system using existing curves ....................................................................... 454
Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves ........................................................................... 455
Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 456

Molded Forms User's Guide 5

 Contents

Openings .................................................................................................................................................. 475

Place an opening by sketching ........................................................................................................... 479
Place an advanced opening ................................................................................................................ 480
Modify an Opening .............................................................................................................................. 480
Copy and paste a sketched opening .................................................................................................. 481
Delete an opening ............................................................................................................................... 481
Opening Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................................... 482
Main Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box).................................................................................. 482
Legacy Catalog Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 482
Opening Palette Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 482
Custom Shape Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 484
Support and Offset Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................ 505
0S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 515
3S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 529
4S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 555
0S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 576
3S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 589
4S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 615
0S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 637
3S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 653
4S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 680
Geometric Construction Explorer ................................................................................................. 703

Place Opening .......................................................................................................................................... 705

Place an opening by boundaries......................................................................................................... 709
Place an opening by shape ................................................................................................................. 710
Place an opening by drawing .............................................................................................................. 711
Place an opening on a sloped wall ..................................................................................................... 713
Place an opening on a leaning wall .................................................................................................... 715
Change a recess opening to a through opening ................................................................................. 717
Change a through opening to a recess opening ................................................................................. 717
Delete an opening ............................................................................................................................... 717
Opening Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................................... 719
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 719

Placing Profile Systems .......................................................................................................................... 721

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection .............................................................................................. 723
Place stiffener profile by intersection ............................................................................................ 728
Modify a stiffener profile ............................................................................................................... 729
Delete a stiffener profile................................................................................................................ 729
Profile Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 729
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 736
Stiffener Profile System by Offset ....................................................................................................... 739
Place stiffener profile by offset ..................................................................................................... 745
Stiffener Profile System by Projection ................................................................................................ 746
Place stiffener profile by projection .............................................................................................. 753
Stiffener Profile System by Table........................................................................................................ 755
Place stiffener profile by table ...................................................................................................... 760
Landing Curve Table Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 760

Molded Forms User's Guide 6

 Contents

Tripping Stiffener System .................................................................................................................... 765

Place tripping stiffener .................................................................................................................. 769
Modify a tripping stiffener profile .................................................................................................. 769
Delete a tripping stiffener profile ................................................................................................... 770
Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 770
Profile Edge Reinforcement ................................................................................................................ 771
Place edge reinforcement profile .................................................................................................. 774
Modify an edge reinforcement profile ........................................................................................... 775
Delete edge reinforcement profile ................................................................................................ 775
Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 775
Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box .............................................................. 779
Modify Profile System Landing Curve Display Colors ........................................................................ 783
Extend ................................................................................................................................................. 785
Extend a profile or seam in one direction ..................................................................................... 785
Extend a profile or seam in both directions .................................................................................. 785
Display a profile or seam dynamically while extending ................................................................ 786

Place Linear Member Systems ............................................................................................................... 787

Place members using discrete placement .......................................................................................... 806
Place members using contiguous placement ..................................................................................... 807
Place a member using finish mode ..................................................................................................... 808
Edit member system properties .......................................................................................................... 809
Edit member part properties ............................................................................................................... 809
Edit a frame connection ...................................................................................................................... 809
Delete a member system .................................................................................................................... 809
Convert a member part ....................................................................................................................... 810
Modify the cardinal point of a member ................................................................................................ 810
Modify the end releases of a member ................................................................................................ 810
Modify the angle of a member ............................................................................................................ 811
Modify the cross-section of a member ................................................................................................ 811
Modify the material of a member ........................................................................................................ 811
Modify the material grade of a member .............................................................................................. 811
Modify the type of member ................................................................................................................. 812
Move a member .................................................................................................................................. 812
Move one end of a member ................................................................................................................ 812
Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................. 813
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) .................................. 813
Relationship Tab........................................................................................................................... 815
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 815
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 817
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 818
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) ............................................. 818
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) ............................................ 824
Designed Member Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 828
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 829
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 832
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 836
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 836
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) .................................................... 839
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box -
Designed Member) ....................................................................................................................... 840

Molded Forms User's Guide 7

 Contents

General Tab .................................................................................................................................. 845

Plate Part Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 845
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 845
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 846
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 847
Weight & CG Tab ......................................................................................................................... 849
Extended User Attributes Tab ...................................................................................................... 849
Routing Tab .................................................................................................................................. 849
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 850
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 850

Place Can.................................................................................................................................................. 860

Place an in-line can ............................................................................................................................. 865
Place an in-line can on cross bracing ................................................................................................. 866
Place an end can ................................................................................................................................ 868
Place a stub-end can .......................................................................................................................... 869
Add a transverse member to a can ..................................................................................................... 870
Remove a transverse member from a can ......................................................................................... 871
Can Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 872
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 872
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 877
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 884

Creating Seams ....................................................................................................................................... 888

Execute Split ....................................................................................................................................... 891
Split a plate system ...................................................................................................................... 893
Split a profile or member system .................................................................................................. 893
Split List Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 894
Manual Split ........................................................................................................................................ 895
Create multiple intersections seams ............................................................................................ 895
Un-Split ............................................................................................................................................... 895
Un-split a plate at a selected seam .............................................................................................. 896
Split Seam ........................................................................................................................................... 897
Split a seam by intersecting seams .............................................................................................. 897
Split List Dialog Box (Split Seam) ................................................................................................. 898
Split Root System................................................................................................................................ 899
Split a root system into multiple root systems .............................................................................. 901
Split Root System Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 901
Seam by Intersection .......................................................................................................................... 902
Place a seam by intersection ....................................................................................................... 903
Modify a seam .............................................................................................................................. 904
Delete a seam .............................................................................................................................. 904
Seam Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 904
Seam by Offset ................................................................................................................................... 905
Place a seam by offset ................................................................................................................. 907
Seam by Projection ............................................................................................................................. 908
Place a seam by Projection .......................................................................................................... 912
Seam by Table .................................................................................................................................... 912
Place a seam by table .................................................................................................................. 914
Profile Seam........................................................................................................................................ 914

Molded Forms User's Guide 8

 Contents

Place a profile seam by offsetting from a reference ..................................................................... 916

Place a profile seam at a distance along the profile ..................................................................... 916
Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 917
Modify Seam Display Colors ............................................................................................................... 918

Place Splits .............................................................................................................................................. 921

Split a member that intersects another member ................................................................................. 925
Split a cross brace .............................................................................................................................. 926
Split columns at a plane ...................................................................................................................... 927
Split a member at a point along member ............................................................................................ 928
Set member split priority ..................................................................................................................... 928
Remove a split .................................................................................................................................... 929
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 929
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 929

Creating Knuckles ................................................................................................................................... 931

Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 931
General Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................... 931
General KNU Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 933
Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 933
Profile Knuckle Tab (Profile Knuckle Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 933
Profile Knuckle .................................................................................................................................... 935
Place a manual profile knuckle by GC point................................................................................. 937
Place a manual profile knuckle by reference curve ...................................................................... 937
Edit a manual profile knuckle ....................................................................................................... 938
Delete a profile knuckle ................................................................................................................ 938
Manual Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 938
Modify Plate Knuckle Curve Display Colors ....................................................................................... 939

Placing Logical Connections ................................................................................................................. 942

Logical Connection ............................................................................................................................. 943
Connect systems using a logical connection ............................................................................... 945
Remove logical connections ......................................................................................................... 945
Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 945
Edit Intersection .................................................................................................................................. 948
Modify a logical connection .......................................................................................................... 950
Invert multiple logical connections ................................................................................................ 950
Invert the logical connection between a plate and a profile ......................................................... 951

Place Assembly Connection .................................................................................................................. 952

Place an assembly connection ........................................................................................................... 959
Edit assembly connection properties .................................................................................................. 960
Delete an assembly connection .......................................................................................................... 960
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection ................................................................................... 960
Edit assembly connection parts .......................................................................................................... 961
Place free end cuts ............................................................................................................................. 961
Edit free end cut properties ................................................................................................................. 961
Delete free end cut .............................................................................................................................. 961
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 962

Molded Forms User's Guide 9

 Contents

Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................. 962

Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 966
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 966

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection ..................................................................................... 968

Place a member generic assembly connection .................................................................................. 970
Edit assembly connection ports .......................................................................................................... 971

Creating Reference Curves .................................................................................................................... 972

Reference Curve by Intersection ........................................................................................................ 973
Place a reference curve by intersection ....................................................................................... 974
Modify a reference curve .............................................................................................................. 975
Delete a reference curve .............................................................................................................. 975
Reference Curve By Intersection Properties Dialog Box ............................................................. 975
Reference Curve by Offset ................................................................................................................. 976
Place a reference curve by offset ................................................................................................. 978
Reference Curve By Offset Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................... 979
Reference Curve by 2D Sketch .......................................................................................................... 980
Place a reference curve by 2D sketch.......................................................................................... 982
Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties Dialog Box ............................................................... 983
Reference Curve from External File.................................................................................................... 984
Place a reference curve by importing from file ............................................................................. 985
Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog Box ......................................................... 985
Modify Reference Curve Display Colors ............................................................................................. 986

Execute Detailing Command .................................................................................................................. 989

Assign part names at placement......................................................................................................... 992
Create detailed parts from plate and profile systems ......................................................................... 992
Delete a smart occurrence object ....................................................................................................... 992
Modify a smart occurrence object ....................................................................................................... 992
Remove detailed parts from plate and profile systems ....................................................................... 993
Detailing Built Up Connections ........................................................................................................... 993
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ................................................................. 994
Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis ...................................................................................... 998
Tube to Tube - Axis Along .......................................................................................................... 1000
Designed Member to Designed Member.................................................................................... 1002
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ............................................................... 1003
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ............................................................... 1004
Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated ................................................................... 1005
Vertical Brace or Gap ................................................................................................................. 1006
Rolled I to Built Up I .................................................................................................................... 1006
Designed Member to Rolled I ..................................................................................................... 1007
Designed Member to Plate ......................................................................................................... 1008
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center ........................................................................................ 1009
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center ............................................................... 1010
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points ........................................................... 1011
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite Connect Points .................................. 1012
Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular ......................................................................................... 1013
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping Connect Points ...................................................... 1014

Molded Forms User's Guide 10

 Contents

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Partial Penetration ............................................ 1015

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration ................................................................................ 1016
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Penetration ........................................................ 1017
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of Member ................................................................... 1018
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both ................................................................................... 1019
Can - Horizontal Beam ............................................................................................................... 1020
Can - Vertical Column ................................................................................................................ 1020
Can - Continuous Leg................................................................................................................. 1021
Can - Multiple Braces ................................................................................................................. 1021
Can - Diameter Change.............................................................................................................. 1022
Can - Single Axis Gap ................................................................................................................ 1023
Can - Multiple Braces ................................................................................................................. 1024
Can - Cone Transition ................................................................................................................ 1025
Can - Beam and Column End Point ........................................................................................... 1025
Can - Beam and Column Intersection ........................................................................................ 1026

Geometric Constructions ..................................................................................................................... 1027

Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 1028
Point Along Curve on Surface .................................................................................................... 1029
Point from Coordinate System ................................................................................................... 1039
Points Along Curve ..................................................................................................................... 1047
Vertices from Curve or Surface .................................................................................................. 1057
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)....................................................................... 1061
Curve as Extended Section ........................................................................................................ 1063
Curve at Offset by Intersection ................................................................................................... 1066
Curve by Curves ......................................................................................................................... 1070
Curve by Intersection .................................................................................................................. 1073
Curve by Points on Surface ........................................................................................................ 1076
Curve by Two Points on Surface ................................................................................................ 1081
Edge from Curve or Surface ....................................................................................................... 1085
Edges from Curve or Surface ..................................................................................................... 1088
Fillet by Curve ............................................................................................................................. 1090
Line by Point, Angle, and Length ............................................................................................... 1094
Line by Points ............................................................................................................................. 1098
Line from Coordinate System ..................................................................................................... 1100
Line String by Points................................................................................................................... 1104
Parallel Line ................................................................................................................................ 1107
Polyline by One to Four Segments ............................................................................................. 1110
Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................... 1115
Plane from Coordinate System .................................................................................................. 1117
Plane by Points ........................................................................................................................... 1120
Plane by Positions ...................................................................................................................... 1123
Plane by Two Points and Normal ............................................................................................... 1126
Surface by Curves ...................................................................................................................... 1130
Surface by Corrugation............................................................................................................... 1133
Surface by Surfaces ................................................................................................................... 1142
Surface by Swage ...................................................................................................................... 1145
Surface by Sweeping.................................................................................................................. 1153
Surface by Blending ................................................................................................................... 1158
Surface by Fillet .......................................................................................................................... 1161
Surface with Knuckles ................................................................................................................ 1165

Molded Forms User's Guide 11

 Contents

Coordinate Systems (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ................................................. 1168

Coordinate System by Lines ...................................................................................................... 1169
Coordinate System by Points ..................................................................................................... 1172
Solids (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 1176
Solid by Sweeping ...................................................................................................................... 1176
Standard Chutes (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ....................................................... 1180
Head Section Type A.................................................................................................................. 1181
Head Section Type B.................................................................................................................. 1190
Head Section Type C ................................................................................................................. 1194
Transition Section Type A .......................................................................................................... 1197
Transition Section Type B .......................................................................................................... 1200
Transition Section Type C .......................................................................................................... 1204
Bifurcated Section Type A .......................................................................................................... 1207
Spoon Section Type A ................................................................................................................ 1210
Geometric Construction Explorer ...................................................................................................... 1214

Importing ACIS and IGES Data ............................................................................................................ 1216

Import ACIS (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1216
Import ACIS or IGES data .......................................................................................................... 1216
Import IGES (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1216

Importing Stiffeners and Seams .......................................................................................................... 1217

Import Stiffeners (File Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1217
Import stiffener or seam data ..................................................................................................... 1217
Import Stiffener Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 1218
Stiffener Import Workbook .......................................................................................................... 1218
Import Seams (File Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1225
Import Seam Dialog Box............................................................................................................. 1225
Seam Import Workbook .............................................................................................................. 1226

Import Ship Structure ............................................................................................................................ 1231

Import ship structure data ................................................................................................................. 1231
Import Ship Structure Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1231
Import Translation Map Workbook .................................................................................................... 1232
Cross Section Worksheet ........................................................................................................... 1232
Material Worksheet..................................................................................................................... 1232

Import Bocad ......................................................................................................................................... 1233

bocad Import Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 1234

Exporting ACIS and IGES Data ............................................................................................................ 1236

Export ACIS (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1236
Export IGES (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1236

Exporting Stiffeners and Seams .......................................................................................................... 1237

Export Stiffeners (File Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1237
Export stiffener data ................................................................................................................... 1238
Export Stiffeners Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1238

Molded Forms User's Guide 12

 Contents

Export Seams (File Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1239

Export seam data ....................................................................................................................... 1239
Export Seams Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1240

Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu) ................................................................................................ 1241

Export data to Neutral XML ............................................................................................................... 1242
Export data to GeniE XML ................................................................................................................ 1243
Configure the GeniE export initialization file ..................................................................................... 1243
GeniE Export Initialization File Global Options ................................................................................. 1243
Limitations of GeniE Export .............................................................................................................. 1244
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1244
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1244
Output Format ............................................................................................................................ 1244
External Geometry Export Options ............................................................................................. 1244
Paths........................................................................................................................................... 1245
Export Attribute Mapping Workbooks ............................................................................................... 1246
ExportAttributeMapping.xls ........................................................................................................ 1246
S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls ..................................................................................................... 1250

Copy by Family ...................................................................................................................................... 1255

Create a copy similar family using a single grid plane ...................................................................... 1260
Create a copy similar family using multiple grid planes .................................................................... 1261
Modify a copy similar family .............................................................................................................. 1262
Delete a copy similar family .............................................................................................................. 1262
Create a copy symmetry family......................................................................................................... 1262
Modify a copy symmetry family ......................................................................................................... 1263
Delete a copy symmetry family ......................................................................................................... 1263
Create a copy across models family using a single grid plane ......................................................... 1263
Create a copy across models family using multiple grid planes ....................................................... 1264
Create a copy across models family by range .................................................................................. 1264
Modify a copy across model family ................................................................................................... 1265
Delete a copy across model family ................................................................................................... 1265
Copy objects in a similar family......................................................................................................... 1265
Update objects in a similar family ..................................................................................................... 1266
Delete objects in a similar family....................................................................................................... 1267
Copy objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................... 1269
Update objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................ 1269
Delete objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................. 1270
Manually copy objects ....................................................................................................................... 1271
Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts .................................................................................................. 1271
Copy objects in an across model family ........................................................................................... 1272
Find and correlate objects across models ........................................................................................ 1273
Select the source filter for copy across models ................................................................................ 1273
Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a batch job....................................................................... 1274
Configure the Smart 3D batch queues ............................................................................................. 1274
Configure account mapping for batch services ................................................................................. 1275
Synchronize Options Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1275
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1276
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 1279
Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 1281

Molded Forms User's Guide 13

 Contents

Select Filter Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 1282

Select Copy Family Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1283
Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1284
Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 1285
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 1287
Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 1288
Copy By Family Log Files ................................................................................................................. 1288
Copy By Family Log File Workflows ........................................................................................... 1289
Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by Family ........................................................ 1292
Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family ...................................................................... 1294
Objects not supported by Copy by Family ........................................................................................ 1302
Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify ....................................................................... 1303
Solutions to common problems in Copy by Family ........................................................................... 1310

Copy By Family Synchronize ............................................................................................................... 1315

Copy By Family Audit Report ............................................................................................................... 1316

Generate an object summary report in manual mode ...................................................................... 1320
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects mode .......................................... 1320
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode .................... 1320
Generate a property summary report in manual mode ..................................................................... 1321
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects mode ........................................ 1321
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode .................. 1321

Topological Points (Insert Menu) ......................................................................................................... 1323

Point Along Curve on Surface........................................................................................................... 1324
Place a topological point on a surface and along a curve .......................................................... 1333
Modify a topological point ........................................................................................................... 1334
Change a topological point to a different point definition ........................................................... 1335
Delete a topological point ........................................................................................................... 1335
Point at Curve Middle ........................................................................................................................ 1335
Place a point at the middle of a curve ........................................................................................ 1340
Point at Minimum Distance ............................................................................................................... 1341
Place a topological point along a girth distance and offset normal to the curve ........................ 1346
Place a topological point offset from the intersection of two offset curves ................................. 1347
Point at Offset from Key Point ........................................................................................................... 1348
Place a topological point referenced from a profile or member cross-section key
point ............................................................................................................................................ 1352
Key Points .................................................................................................................................. 1353
Point from Coordinate System .......................................................................................................... 1358
Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate system origin .................................... 1364
Place a topological point by distances from a reference point ................................................... 1364

Delay Settings (Tools Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1366

Turn on delay operations .................................................................................................................. 1366
Update delayed objects .................................................................................................................... 1366
Turn off delay operations .................................................................................................................. 1366
Delay Operations Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 1367
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ................................................................... 1367

Molded Forms User's Guide 14

 Contents

Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ...................................................... 1367

To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)................................................ 1368

Repairing Tribon Data ........................................................................................................................... 1369

Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1369
Repair Tribon data ...................................................................................................................... 1369
Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1369

Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1371

Check data integrity of plates............................................................................................................ 1371
Results Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 1372

Manufacturing Service Manager .......................................................................................................... 1375

Review a manufacturing object ......................................................................................................... 1377
Update a manufacturing object ......................................................................................................... 1377
Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter ...................................................................... 1377
Review Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 1378
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box .................................................................................. 1379

Submit Batch Job .................................................................................................................................. 1380

Run a detailing batch process........................................................................................................... 1380
Run a production batch process ....................................................................................................... 1381
Run a custom batch process ............................................................................................................ 1381
Add a custom batch process............................................................................................................. 1382
Generic Batch Command Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1383
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box................................................................................................. 1384

Miscellaneous Commands ................................................................................................................... 1385

Change Geometry Type (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................ 1385
Modify geometry type ................................................................................................................. 1385
Measure Explicit (Tools Menu) ......................................................................................................... 1386
Measure using a temporary coordinate system ......................................................................... 1387
Measure a girth distance along a landing curve ......................................................................... 1387
Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu).................................................................................................. 1388
Use filters to view copied objects requiring reconnection .......................................................... 1388
Reconnect copied objects to a new boundary ........................................................................... 1390
Reconnect temporary definition and sketching planes to model reference planes .................... 1390
Rebound objects ......................................................................................................................... 1391
Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1391
Automatic Preview (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1395

Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay ........................................................... 1396
Prepare the model ............................................................................................................................ 1397
Copy the model ................................................................................................................................. 1397
Start error logging ............................................................................................................................. 1398
Select delay and range settings and swap the hulls ......................................................................... 1398
Check the To-Do List ........................................................................................................................ 1400
Check the seam pattern on the new hull .......................................................................................... 1400

Molded Forms User's Guide 15

 Contents

Repair seams that did not split .......................................................................................................... 1401

Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the hull ............................................................... 1402
Check hull records on the To-Do List................................................................................................ 1402
Remove delay and update To-Do List records for internal structure ................................................ 1403
Check internal structure records on the To-Do List .......................................................................... 1403
Check internal structure in the model ............................................................................................... 1403
Update remaining To-Do List records ............................................................................................... 1403
Evaluate results................................................................................................................................. 1404
Recover from a failed hull swap ........................................................................................................ 1405
Stop error logging.............................................................................................................................. 1405
Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps ...................................................................................... 1406

Data Integrity Check Messages ........................................................................................................... 1407

All seams or knuckles are ignored in split. ........................................................................................ 1408
Bad connection (either missing port or invalid port in connection) ................................................... 1408
Bad edge attributes because of knuckle <name of knuckle>. Check connection. ........................... 1408
Bad edge attributes because of seam <name of seam>. Check connection. .................................. 1409
Connection has no geometry. ........................................................................................................... 1409
Could not find the boundary/operator creating the edge. Check the connection. ............................ 1410
Could not get back the edge information. Check connection ........................................................... 1410
Could not retrieve boundary. Check connection. .............................................................................. 1410
Could not retrieve edge information. Check connection. .................................................................. 1411
Could not retrieve the children of the plate system........................................................................... 1411
Could not retrieve the root plate........................................................................................................ 1411
Duplicate Physical Connection. ........................................................................................................ 1412
Edge port doesn't have geometry. Check connection. ..................................................................... 1412
Entire length of seam ignored in split. ............................................................................................... 1413
Error - Has opposite surface normal as the root plate <name of root plate> ................................... 1413
Failure encountered while checking seam geometry and split result. .............................................. 1413
Failure encountered while retrieving thickness. ................................................................................ 1414
Gap detected in the seam bounding. ................................................................................................ 1414
In to-do list: <to-do list item> ............................................................................................................. 1415
Inconsistent attributes between system and part geometry. Check connection. .............................. 1415
Inconsistent port attributes between root plate and leaf plate. Check connection. .......................... 1415
Knuckle <name of knuckle> has no geometry. ................................................................................. 1416
<length in meters> of seam length ignored in split. .......................................................................... 1416
Missing boundary connection to <object name> .............................................................................. 1417
Missing child connections. ................................................................................................................ 1417
Missing connection with <object name> ........................................................................................... 1417
Missing root intersection connection with <object name> ................................................................ 1418
No splitting surface - will be ignored in split. Check the seam creation. ........................................... 1418
Not used in splitting. .......................................................................................................................... 1419
Seam <name of seam> has no geometry. ........................................................................................ 1419
Seam overlaps knuckle <name of knuckle> ..................................................................................... 1419
Seam overlaps seam <name of seam>. ........................................................................................... 1420
Part light part geometry might be corrupted. .................................................................................... 1420
Plate has no plate part children. ....................................................................................................... 1421
The seam has multiple segments; there may be a problem in the split............................................ 1421
The wrong item is used in the bounding logical connection. ............................................................ 1421
There is a gap in the boundary <name of boundary>. Detailing might fail. ...................................... 1422
Too many child connections. ............................................................................................................ 1423

Molded Forms User's Guide 16

 Contents

Unable to check for seams in To Do List. ......................................................................................... 1423

Unknown error................................................................................................................................... 1424
Warning!!--Possible wrong thickness direction among leaf parts. .................................................... 1424

Tripping Bracket .................................................................................................................................... 1425

Add a flange to a catalog bracket system ......................................................................................... 1428
Modify a bracket system ................................................................................................................... 1429
Delete a bracket system ................................................................................................................... 1429
Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1429
Main Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 1429
Material Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)...................................................... 1432
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ................................. 1432
Bracket Parameters Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) .................................. 1445
Bracket Flange Properties Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)......................... 1446
Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties
Dialog Box) ................................................................................................................................. 1447
Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 1448
Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) .......................................... 1448
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) ...................................... 1448

Shell Plate Unfold Preview ................................................................................................................... 1449

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 1450

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1468

Molded Forms User's Guide 17

Preface
TM
This document is a user's guide for the Molded Forms functionality of Intergraph Smart 3D and
provides command reference information and procedural instructions.

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).

What's New in Molded Forms

The following changes have been made to the Molded Forms task.
Version 2016 (11.0)
 Formerly known as SmartPlant 3D (SP3D) and SmartMarine 3D (SM3D), the products are
now integrated and rebranded as Smart 3D (S3D). Replaced all instances of SP3D and
SM3D with S3D in the Export Neutral/GeniE XML section of this guide. (P1 CP:273062)
 The Bracket Plate System command improves the workflow for bracket creation. Length 1
and Length 2 boxes do not display by default when Support 1 and Support 2 are planar. For
curved supports, Length 1 and Length 2 boxes control the bracket plane position, but not
bracket creation. Bracket browser and rule creation icons are improved. For more information,
see Bracket Plate System Ribbon in Bracket Plate System (on page 227). (P1 CP:271139,
P1 CP:244914, P3 CP:251341)
 When you copy a plate system using Delete Optional in the Paste command, the software
replaces the plate with a standalone boundary to prevent the plate from going to the To Do
List. For more information, see Placing Plate Systems (on page 96). (P1 CP:210300)
 Delete Optional in the Paste command supports plates, openings, profile systems, tripping
stiffeners, seams, profile seams, and reference curves. (P1 CP:210300, CP:210328,
CP:210340, CP:210345, CP:210378, CP:210388, CP:210397, CP:261307, CP:262625)
 Model Data Transform supports plates, profile systems, tripping stiffeners, profile seams,
topological openings, and sketched openings. (P1 CP:231434, CP:231435, CP:231439,
CP:231448, CP:258168)
 You can create multiple plate systems with appropriate macros in the Advanced Plate
System command. (P1 CP:245070, P2 CP:259821)
 Export to Neutral Schema now supports mapping of custom attributes on the Smart 3D
objects, and exporting these attributes to the neutral schema. New class map sheets are
added to map these attributes. For more information, see Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File
Menu) (on page 1241) and ExportAttributeMapping.xls (on page 1246). (P2 CP:218559)
 A new option, Non Planar, has been added to Plate Systems under External Geometry
Export Options in the Export NSchema/GeniE dialog box. For more information, see
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box (on page 1244). (P2 CP:274229)

Molded Forms User's Guide 18

 Preface

 Information related to exporting of Non Planar plate systems has been added. For more
information, see Export data to Neutral XML (on page 1242). (P2 CP:274229)
 Welded, Snip, Cutback, and Bracketed are now available as options for defining the profile
connection types. For more information, see PDBT MF Section Orientation Tab (see "Section
Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box)" on page 732). (P2 CP:264507, CP:280640)
 Updated Objects not supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302), Objects and behaviors
supported in Attribute Modify (on page 1303), and Solutions to common problems in Copy by
Family (on page 1310). (P2 CP:237601, CP:211489, CP:211490, CP:213977, CP:238915,
CP:238917, CP:253294)
 The naming rule is improved for a plate system that is not on a reference plane. For more
information, see Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107). (P2
CP:256932)
 A new property, CoG Coordinate System, is available for defining center of gravity
properties. For more information, see Weight & CG Tab (on page 129). (P2 CR:236999)
 Plane controls are simplified. The controls are used in multiple commands for defining planes.
For more information, see Plane Methods (on page 76). (P2: 244830)
 The Boundary List dialog box supports offset values, enhanced display of boundaries in the
graphic view, display of standalone planes, and improved boundary list controls. For more
information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83). (P2 CP:230926, CP:262705,
CP:297356)
 The Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View option on the Boundary List dialog box
allows you to extend a sketched boundary without entering Sketch 2D. For more information,
see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83) and Planar Plate System (on page 99). (P2
CP:274205)
 Added descriptions of molded conventions for the individual plates of a designed (built-up)
member. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box - Designed Member) (on page 840). (P2 CP:264474)
 Expanded the descriptions of molded conventions for plate systems. As an example, see
Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 110). (P2
CP:264474)
 The workflow for offsetting a seam using the Profile Seam command is improved. For more
information, see Profile Seam (on page 914). (P2 CP:264024)
 To improve usability, commonly used properties are available on the plate system command
ribbons. For more information, see Planar Plate System (on page 99), Imported Plate System
(on page 130), Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156), Nonlinear Extruded Plate
System (on page 180), Revolved Plate System (on page 205), Bracket Plate System (on
page 227), Advanced Plate System (on page 275), Child Plate System (on page 426), and
Ruled Plate System (on page 449). (P2 CP:276091, CP:292407)
 To improve usability, commonly used properties are available on the profile system command
ribbons. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Intersection (on page 723),
Stiffener Profile System by Offset (on page 739), Stiffener Profile System by Projection (on
page 746), Stiffener Profile System by Table (on page 755), and Tripping Stiffener System
(on page 765) (P2 CP:276090,CP:292407)
 The Subtype plate system property specifies an additional plate type that is independent of
the Type value. The subtype does not affect molded conventions or profile naming. For more
information, see Planar Plate System (on page 99), Imported Plate System (on page 130),

Molded Forms User's Guide 19

 Preface

Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156), Nonlinear Extruded Plate System (on page
180), Revolved Plate System (on page 205), Bracket Plate System (on page 227), Advanced
Plate System (on page 275), Child Plate System (on page 426), and Ruled Plate System (on
page 449). (P2 CP:227200)
 Added the Copy MfgData option to the Across Model Family Definition dialog box. For
more information, see Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box (on page 1281). (P2
CP:245086)
 Added the Submit Batch Job command to run batch processes using the Intergraph Batch
Services framework. For more information, see Submit Batch Job (on page 1380). (P2
CP:273093, P2 CP:178040)
 Added a new locate filter, Construction Graphics. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 40). (P2 CP:271166)
 Updated Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 1294), Objects not
supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302), and Objects and behaviors supported in
Attribute Modify (on page 1303) for Version 2016. (P3 CP:288254)
 The Description option has been removed for bracket plate systems. For more information,
see Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 250). (P2 CP:272877)
 The Automatic Rebound command is now named Automatic Reconnect and reconnects
boundaries and definition planes on copied objects. You can also filter the workspace to
highlight objects with definition planes and boundaries defined by standalone planes. For
more information, see Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) (on page 1388),Use filters to view
copied objects requiring reconnection (on page 1388), and Plane Tab (Automatic Reconnect
Dialog Box) (on page 1394). (P2 CP:271267, CP:259014, CP: 273850)
 A profile can be split by a penetrating standard member (P2 CP:177250)
 Openings migrated from the previous version of the software maintain their sketches and
constraints (P2 CP:178057)
 You can select a standard member as a support for a bracket by supports (P2 CP:187594)
 Plate systems can be split by planning seams in addition to design seams. (P2 CP: 229642)
 When creating plate systems, gaps between boundaries display with a glyph to aid in
identifying the gap. (P2 CP:244838)
 WBS commands support Molded Forms objects (P2 CP:268662)
 Filters are available on the Select by Filter dialog box to select objects by plate thickness,
profile cross-section name, plate and profile material, and plate and profile grade. (P2
CP:273852, CP:273853, CP:273854)
 Added information about the options that you can change on root edge reinforcement
systems and leaf edge reinforcement systems. For more information, see Section Orientation
Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 777). (P3 CP:254962)
 Added information about which objects Smart 3D copies as well as what types of
modifications are supported by Copy Symmetry, Copy Similar, and Copy Across Model.
For more information, see the following:
Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by Family (on page 1292)
Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 1294)
Objects not supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302)
Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify (on page 1303)
Solutions to common problems in Copy by Family (on page 1310)

Molded Forms User's Guide 20

 Preface

(P3 CP:263679)
 Expanded Advanced Plate System help to include an overview, ribbon description, and
workflow for each macro. For more information, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on
page 283). (P3 CP:253349)
 After a command using geometric constructions is interrupted and restarted, you can recover
geometric constructions created before the interruption. For more information, see Geometric
Constructions (on page 1027). (P3 CP:257735)
 Import and Export commands and error display are available for geometric constructions.
For more information, see Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 1214). (P3 CP:185171)
 You can add a profile seam to a stiffener profile system by offset (P3 CP:187396)
 Concurrent highlighting of selected boundary objects in the Workspace Explorer and
graphic view is improved. (P3 CP:251413)
 When a plate system with openings is rebounded in a way that the openings will fall outside
of the plate boundaries, the plate modifications complete, and the software places the
openings on the To Do List. (P3 CP:272150)
 Added information on the Pick Edges option for selecting boundaries. For more
information, see Boundary Methods (on page 80). (P3 CP:289423)
 For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole, Maintenance,
and Operation aspects displaying in the 3D graphic view also display in the Sketch 2D
environment. In marine mode, the additional aspects also display in Sketch 2D for Openings.
For more information, see Format View Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide. (P4 CP:
119768)
 Updated the descriptions of the Thickening Technique Requested and Thickening
Technique Used properties on the General tab of the Plate Part Properties dialog box. For
more information, see General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127). (P4
CP:258906)

Molded Forms User's Guide 21

SECTION 1

Molded Forms
TM
The Molded Forms task of Intergraph Smart 3D is used to define basic structure of the model,
including planar plates, non-planar plates, major openings, stiffeners, and design seams. Using
this task, you create:
 High-level plate and profile design systems. These systems contain properties such as type,
thickness, continuity, and molded conventions.
 Child plate and profile design systems. All high-level systems have at least one child. If a
high-level system has been split, it has two or more child systems.
 Root parts. These parts are created automatically as children of systems. They have
thickness and inherit the properties of their parent systems. These properties are used to
detail the root parts in the Structural Detailing task and to generate data for manufacturing in
the Structural Manufacturing task.
 Logical connections. These connections are created automatically as children of systems and
contain the connection properties between systems. These properties are used to detail the
connections in the Structural Detailing task and to generate data for manufacturing in the
Structural Manufacturing task.
You can start the Molded Forms task by clicking Tasks > Molded Forms. The Molded Forms
task has these commands:

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting Objects
(on page 40).

Planar Plate System - Places a planar plate system. For more information, see Planar
Plate System (on page 99).

Imported Plate System - Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is used to
create a plate system, typically a complex, non-planar system such as a ship hull. For
more information, see Imported Plate System (on page 130).

Linear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve normal to the
sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve along a
linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. For more information, see Nonlinear Extruded
Plate System (on page 180).

Revolved Plate System - Places a plate system by rotating a curve around an axis. For
more information, see Revolved Plate System (on page 205).

Bracket Plate System - Creates plate systems that represent primary structural brackets.
Bracket orientation is defined by a plane or bracket supports. For more information, see
Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Molded Forms User's Guide 22

 Molded Forms

Advanced Plate System - Creates specialized plate systems such as side plates, ring
plates, transition plates, continuity plates, and buckling plates. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Child Plate System - Creates a plate system that is a child to another plate system. For
more information, see Child Plate System (on page 426).

Ruled Plate System - Creates a plate system that is interpolated between two non-planar
curves. For more information, see Ruled Plate System (on page 449).

Openings - Places a major opening in a plate system. For more information, see
Openings (on page 475).

Member Openings - Places openings (holes) in slabs and linear member systems. For
more information, see Place Opening (on page 705).

Execute Split - Automatically creates intersection seams and splits systems by

intersection and design seams. The split creates new subsystems. For more information,
see Execute Split (on page 891).

Manual Split - Allows multiple seams and splits to be placed. For more information, see
Manual Split (on page 895).

Place Split - Divides a member system into multiple member parts while maintaining the
design intent of the original member system. For more information, see Place Splits (on
page 921).

Split Seam - Splits a seam by intersecting seams. For more information, see Split Seam
(on page 897).

Split Root System - Splits a top-level (or root) plate or profile system into multiple root
systems. For more information, see Split Root System (on page 899).

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection - Creates a stiffener profile system on the

selected plate system by defining the landing curve of the stiffener as the intersection of
the selected plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Stiffener Profile
System by Intersection (on page 723).

Stiffener Profile System by Offset - Creates a stiffener profile system on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (a seam,
plate boundary, plate edge, the landing curve of another profile system, or grid plane). For
more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Offset (on page 739).

Stiffener Profile System by Projection - Creates a stiffener profile system on the

selected plate system by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the
plate system. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Projection (on page
746).

Stiffener Profile System by Table - Creates a stiffener profile system on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. For more information,
see Stiffener Profile System by Table (on page 755).

Molded Forms User's Guide 23

 Molded Forms

Tripping Stiffener System - Creates a tripping stiffener on a selected plate system. For
more information, see Tripping Stiffener System (on page 765).

Profile Edge Reinforcement - Places a profile system along the free edge of a plate
system. For more information, see Profile Edge Reinforcement (on page 771).

Place Linear Member - Places columns, beams, braces, and other linear members in the
model. For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on page 787).

Place Can - Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a
member to increase the surface area available for connections or to provide increased wall
thickness or both. For more information, see Place Can (on page 860).

Logical Connection - Creates a relationship between two molded form systems to identify
that the two systems are connected. For more information, see Logical Connection (on
page 943).

Place Assembly Connection - Places assembly connections between linear member

systems. For more information, see Place Assembly Connection (on page 952).

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection - Places an assembly connection

between a built-up member part and an intersecting part. For more information, see Place
Member Generic Assembly Connection (on page 968).

Seam by Intersection - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the
landing curve of the seam as the intersection of the selected plate system and a grid plane.
For more information, see Seam by Intersection (on page 902).

Seam by Offset - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the landing
curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another seam, plate boundary, profile
system, or grid plane). For more information, see Seam by Offset (on page 905).

Seam by Projection - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by projecting a 2D or

3D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system. For more information, see
Seam by Projection (on page 908).

Seam by Table - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the landing
curve as coordinates in a table. For more information, see Seam by Table (on page 912).

Profile Seam - Creates a design seam on a profile or on all profiles that belong to a plate
system. For more information, see Profile Seam (on page 914).

Profile Knuckle - Places a manual profile knuckle on a selected profile system. For more
information, see Profile Knuckle (on page 935).

Reference Curve by Intersection - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate

system by defining the landing curve of the reference plane as the intersection of the
selected plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Reference Curve by
Intersection (on page 973).

Molded Forms User's Guide 24

 Molded Forms

Reference Curve by Offset - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate system by
defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another grid,
mark, or reference). For more information, see Reference Curve by Offset (on page 976).

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate system
by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system. For more
information, see Reference Curve by 2D Sketch (on page 980).

Reference Curve from External File - Creates and modifies knuckle reference curves.
These curves require that the edges of the sheetbody faces carry an attribute that reflects
that they are knuckles and relates them to the appropriate reference curve. For more
information, see Reference Curve from External File (on page 984).

Execute Detailing - Creates detail parts from the root part of a plate or profile system. For
more information, see Execute Detailing Command (on page 989).

Import IGES - Imports 3D geometric data from a file in the IGES (Initial Graphics
Exchange Standard) format. This command is on the File menu. For more information, see
Import IGES (File Menu) (on page 1216).

Import ACIS - Imports 3D geometric data from a file in the ACIS .sat format. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import ACIS (File Menu) (on
page 1216).

Import Stiffeners - Imports stiffener profile systems from data in a Microsoft Excel
workbook. This command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import Stiffeners
(File Menu) (on page 1217).

Import Seams - Imports design seams from data in a Microsoft Excel workbook. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import Seams (File Menu) (on
page 1225).

Import Ship Structure - Imports Tribon ship structure data for use as background
structure in planning and outfitting work. This command is only available if the Smart 3D
Tribon Interface is installed. For more information, see Import Ship Structure (File Menu).

Export IGES - Exports 3D geometric data to a file in the IGES format. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export IGES (File Menu) (on page 1236).

Export ACIS - Exports geometric data to a file in the ACIS .sat format. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export ACIS (File Menu) (on page 1236).

Export Stiffeners - Exports stiffener data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. This command is
on the File menu. For more information, see Export Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1237).

Export Seams - Exports seam data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export Seams (File Menu) (on page 1239).

Neutral/GeniE Export - Exports model data to a neutral or GeniE XML format. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File
Menu) (on page 1241).

Molded Forms User's Guide 25

 Molded Forms

Copy by Family - Replicates objects in the model maintaining a relationship between the
copies. This command is available on the Edit menu. For more information, see Copy by
Family (on page 1255).

Copy by Family Synchronize - Opens the Copy by Family ribbon with the last used
family set as the default family. This command is available on the Edit menu. For more
information, see Copy By Family Synchronize (on page 1315).

Copy by Family Audit Report - Creates a report that allows you to verify that the source
has been copied to the target. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more
information, see Copy By Family Audit Report (on page 1316).

Change Geometry Type - Modifies the geometry type of a plate. This command is
available on the Edit menu. For more information, see Change Geometry Type (Edit
Menu) (on page 1385).

Topological Points - Creates associative points directly in the graphic view. This
command is available on the Insert menu. For more information, see Topological Points
(Insert Menu) (on page 1323).

Delay Settings - Delays the update of existing Structural Detailing and Structural
Manufacturing objects when the parent Molded Form object is modified, putting the objects
on the To Do List for future update. This command is available on the Tools menu. For
more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366).

Data Integrity Check - Verifies the data integrity of Molded Forms systems in your model
before creating detailed parts in the Structural Detailing task. This command is available
on the Tools menu. For more information, see Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page
1371).

Measure Explicit - Measures girth distances along landing curves in a cumulative fashion.
This command is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see Measure Explicit
(Tools Menu) (on page 1386).

Automatic Rebound - Changes the boundary from one object to another. This command
is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see Rebound objects (on page
1391).

Submit Batch Job - Runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see
Submit Batch Job (on page 1380).

Un-Split - Merges plates into a single plate leaving the seam in the model so that you can
use the seam to split the plate again at a later time. For more information, see Un-Split (on
page 895).

Tripping Bracket - Provides compatibility with brackets created with Bracket Plate
System in earlier versions of the software. For more information, see Tripping Bracket
(on page 1425).

To create new tripping brackets, use Bracket Plate System and

Molded Forms User's Guide 26

 Molded Forms

select Plane by Selected Supports as the value for Select Plane.

Shell Plate Unfold Preview - Generates a graphic preview of an unfolded plate shape
with frame marks, roll line marks, surrounding minimum rectangle and annotation
representing dimensions of minimum rectangle, unfolded surface area and percentage of
material utilization in a private graphic view. For more information, see Shell Plate Unfold
Preview (on page 1449).

See Also
Molded Forms Workflow (on page 28)

Molded Forms User's Guide 27

SECTION 2

Molded Forms Workflow

All molded forms objects are placed in the model using information defined in the reference data.
The first steps are to review, edit, and otherwise customize the delivered reference data. These
steps are performed by an administrator with permissions to change the reference data prior to
the start of modeling.
After the reference data is customized, your administrator needs to define the molded forms
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. The systems are typically in a predefined work
breakdown structure.
Because molded forms rely on grid planes, your administrator must go to the Grids task and
place grid planes before you can place any molded forms objects in your model.
After the reference data and the needed systems are defined, you can begin placing molded
forms objects in your model.

Place the Hull

Import an ACIS or IGES file into your model to create the hull. For more information, see Import a
plate system (on page 136).

Place Decks and Bulkheads

Create the major plate systems in your model that represent the decks and bulkheads. You have
several methods for placing these plate systems:
Place a planar plate system (on page 104)
Place a linear extruded plate system (on page 161)
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system (on page 185)
Place a revolved plate system (on page 209)
Create a ruled plate system using existing curves (on page 454)
Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions (on page 282)
Bracket Plate System (on page 227)

Place Openings
After the deck and bulkheads are in the model, add the major openings such as cargo hold
hatches.
Place an opening by sketching (on page 479)
Place an advanced opening (on page 480)

Create Stiffener Profile Systems

Place stiffeners as needed. You have several methods for placing stiffeners:
Place stiffener profile by intersection (on page 728)
Place stiffener profile by offset (on page 745)
Place stiffener profile by projection (on page 753)
Place stiffener profile by table (on page 760)

Molded Forms User's Guide 28

 Molded Forms Workflow

Place tripping stiffener (on page 769)

Import stiffener or seam data (on page 1217)

Place Seams
Place design and planning seams as needed. You have several methods for placing seams:
Seam by Intersection (on page 902)
Seam by Offset (on page 905)
Seam by Projection (on page 908)
Seam by Table (on page 912)
Profile Seam (on page 914)
Import stiffener or seam data (on page 1217)

Place Edge Reinforcement Profile Systems

Place edge reinforcements as needed. For more information, see Place edge reinforcement
profile (on page 774).

Execute the Splits

When all the design seams are placed, you need to split the plate and profile systems.
Split a plate system (on page 893)
Split a profile or member system (on page 893)
Create multiple intersections seams (on page 895)
Split a seam by intersecting seams (on page 897)
Split a member that intersects another member (on page 925)

In This Section
Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer ................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer ................................................... 32
Selecting Objects ........................................................................... 40
Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects ................................ 44
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ............................... 45
Best Practices ................................................................................ 50
Plane Methods ............................................................................... 76
Boundary Methods ......................................................................... 80
Landing Curve Methods ................................................................. 87
Profile Orientation .......................................................................... 88
Center of Buoyancy ....................................................................... 91
Minimum Distance ......................................................................... 92

Molded Forms User's Guide 29

 Molded Forms Workflow

Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer

Plates and profiles gain children objects in the Workspace Explorer hierarchy as the model
progresses from early design in Molded Forms through manufacturing parts in Structural
Manufacturing. The following objects appear on the System tab of the Workspace Explorer:
Root system
Contains the top-level properties for a plate or profile, such as continuity, tightness, material
grade, and molded conventions, but does not contain all physical attributes. For example, a
root plate system is a surface without thickness, and a root profile system is a landing curve.
Leaf or child system
Inherits the properties of the parent root system. Properties can be manually changed to be
different from the root system. Each root system is created with a leaf system. When the root
system is split, additional leaf systems are created.
Plate part
Inherits the properties of the parent leaf system and begins to carry physical attributes. Each
leaf system has a plate part. There are two types of plate parts:
Light part
The initial part created in Molded Forms. Plate parts have thickness and profile parts
have cross-sections, but other physical attributes are not considered. For example, parts
are not trimmed at their boundaries and profile part locations are not adjusted based on
plate part thickness.
Detailed part
Replaces the light part after detailing the part in Structural Detailing. Parts gain additional
physical attributes. For example, plates are now trimmed at their boundaries; profile
webs and flanges are trimmed.
Root logical connection
Contains top-level properties for a connection between plate and profile systems. Each root
logical connection is a child of a root system.
Leaf or child logical connection
Each root logical connection is created with a leaf logical connection. When the root logical
connection is split, additional leaf logical connections are created.
Assembly connection
Inherits the properties of the parent leaf logical connection. An assembly connection is
created when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. Each assembly connection is a child
of a leaf logical connection. An assembly connection contains properties used for physical
connections (welds) and features such as end cuts, slots, and collars.
Feature
Contains properties and physical attributes for detailed features such as end cuts, slots, or
collars. A feature is created when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. Each feature is a
child of an assembly connection.
Physical connection
Contains properties and physical attributes for welds. Physical connections are created for

Molded Forms User's Guide 30

 Molded Forms Workflow

each assembly connection when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. End-to-end and
edge-to-edge connections have one physical connection for each part. Each physical
connection is a child of an assembly connection or a feature.

Examples
Plate

1 - Root system
2 - Leaf system
3 - Light part
4 - Detailed part
5 - Root logical connection
6 - Leaf logical connection
7 - Assembly connection
8 - Collar feature
9 - Slot feature
10 - Physical connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 31

 Molded Forms Workflow

Profile

1 - Root system
2 - Leaf system
3 - Detailed part
4 - Root logical connection
5 - Leaf logical connection
6 - Assembly connection
7 - End cut feature
8 - Physical connection

 Objects created in Structural Manufacturing, such as manufacturing parts, templates, and pin
jigs, are children to parts, blocks, or assemblies on the Assembly tab of the Workspace
Explorer.
 Plate Systems display at the same level in the hierarchy as Bracket Plate Systems. If you
filter on Plate Systems, the software also displays Bracket Plate Systems as shown in the
following figure. This happens because the leaf system of a bracket plate system is a plate
system object. The bracket plate system is included in the workspace because it is the parent
of the leaf plate system.

Icons in the Workspace Explorer

Analysis Folder

Analysis Model

Assembly

Assembly Connection

Beam Part - undetailed

Beam Part - detailed

Molded Forms User's Guide 32

 Molded Forms Workflow

Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - undetailed

Bearing Plate - detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group member

Bearing Plate - group member, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group master

Bearing Plate - group master, manufactured

Block

Boundary Condition

Bracket System or Leaf System

Bracket Part - undetailed

Bracket Part - detailed

Bracket Part - detailed, manufactured

Bracket Part - group member

Bracket Part - group member, manufactured

Bracket Part - group master

Bracket Part - group master, manufactured

Cable Nozzle on Equipment

Cabletray Nozzle on Equipment

Collar Plate - undetailed

Collar Plate - detailed

Collar Plate - detailed, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 33

 Molded Forms Workflow

Collar Plate - group member

Collar Plate - group member, manufactured

Collar Plate - group master

Collar Plate - group master, manufactured

Common Part Manager

Conduit Nozzle on Equipment

Coordinate System

Coordinate System Axis

Coordinate System Grid Plane

Coordinate System Elevation Plane

Coordinate System Radial Plane

Coordinate System Radial Cylinder

Curved Member Part - undetailed

Curved Member Part - light

Curved Member Part - light, manufactured

Curved Member Part - detailed

Curved Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group member

Curved Member Part - group member, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group master

Curved Member Part - group master, manufactured

Designed Equipment Component

Designed Equipment

Molded Forms User's Guide 34

 Molded Forms Workflow

Designed Handrail

Designed Member - undetailed

Designed Member - light

Designed Member - light, manufactured

Designed Member - detailed

Designed Member - detailed, manufactured

Designed Member - group member

Designed Member - group member, manufactured

Designed Member - group master

Designed Member - group master, manufactured

Edge Treatment

Equipment

Equipment Component

Equipment Foundation

Equipment Shape

Equipment Solid

Equipment Solid - Added

Equipment Solid - Subtracted

Equipment Solid - Suppressed

Feature (includes corner feature, edge feature, face feature, slot, and so on)

Footing

Footing Components

Foundation Port

Frame Connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 35

 Molded Forms Workflow

Handrail

HVAC Nozzle on equipment

Insert Plate - undetailed

Insert Plate - detailed

Insert Plate - detailed, manufactured

Insert Plate - group member

Insert Plate - group member, manufactured

Insert Plate - group master

Insert Plate - group master, manufactured

Ladder

Linear Member Part - undetailed

Linear Member Part - light

Linear Member Part - light, manufactured

Linear Member Part - detailed

Linear Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group member

Linear Member Part - group member, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group master

Linear Member Part - group master, manufactured

Load Case

Load Combination

Member Assembly Connection Cutback Feature

Member Assembly Connection Plate Part

Molded Forms User's Guide 36

 Molded Forms Workflow

Member Assembly Connection

Member Fireproofing

Member Part

Member Split Connection

Member System

Opening

Panel - manufactured

Physical Connection

Pipe Nozzle on Equipment

Planning Joint - butt weld

Planning Joint - lap weld

Planning Joint - tee weld

Planning Joint Folder

Plate - light

Plate Part - undetailed

Plate Part - light

Plate Part - light, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured, with manufacturing part assembly child

Plate Part - group member

Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Plate Part - group master

Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 37

 Molded Forms Workflow

Plate System or leaf system

Profile Edge Reinforcement System or Leaf System

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part detailed, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Seam - Design

Seam - Intersection

Seam - Planning

Seam - Straking

Slab Assembly Connection

Slab

Stair

Standalone Beam Part - undetailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - undetailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed

Molded Forms User's Guide 38

 Molded Forms Workflow

Standalone Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group member

Standalone Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group master

Standalone Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - undetailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - undetailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener Part - undetailed

Stiffener Part - light

Stiffener Part - light, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 39

 Molded Forms Workflow

Stiffener Part - detailed

Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group member

Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group master

Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener System or Leaf System

Wall Assembly Connection

Wall Part

Wall Run

Wall System

Selecting Objects
All objects in the Molded Forms task have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the object that you want to edit or work with.
An important part of the Select command is the
Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon. The
Locate Filter box contains pre-defined filters for
the Select command. When you choose a filter in
the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered objects in a graphic view
and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Seams, you can select only design,
intersection, planning, or a seam point in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Molded Forms task includes these filters:
Bracket Plate Systems
Limits your selection to bracket plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 40

 Molded Forms Workflow

Plate Systems display at the same level in the hierarchy as Bracket Plate
Systems. If you filter on Plate Systems, the software also displays Bracket Plate Systems
as shown in the following figure. This happens because the leaf system of a bracket plate
system is a plate system object. The bracket plate system is included in the workspace
because it is the parent of the leaf plate system.

Connections
Limits your selection to:
 Indent 2
 Logical connections
 Frame connections
 Split connections
 Indent bullet 3
 Indent bullet 4
Control Points
Limits your selection to control points. You define the location of a control point with Insert >
Control Point.
Construction Graphics
Limits your selection to lines, line strings, arcs, circles, and rectangles created with Insert >
Construction Graphics.
Members
Limits your selection to member parts.
Member Systems
Limits your selection to:
 Standard members
 Design members
 Cans
Molded Forms (Leaf Level)
Limits your selection to:
 Leaf plate systems
 Leaf stiffener systems
 Leaf edge reinforcements
 Leaf logical connections
 Grids

Molded Forms User's Guide 41

 Molded Forms Workflow

 Standard members
 Cans
Molded Forms (Root Level)
Limits your selection to:
 Root plate systems
 Root bracket plate system
 Root stiffener systems
 Root edge reinforcements
 Root beam systems
 Root logical connections
 Seams
 Seam point
 Openings
 Knuckles
 Reference curves
 Grids
 Frames (Child of grid frame system)
 Frame connections
 Split connections
 Standard members
 Designed members
 Cans
Openings
Limits your selection to major openings and member openings.
Parts
Limits your selection to:
 Plate parts
 Profile parts
 Beam parts
 Edge reinforcement parts
 Member parts
Points
Limits your selection to topological points. You define the location of a control point with the
Insert > Topological Points command.
RefCurve on Surface & Knuckles

Molded Forms User's Guide 42

 Molded Forms Workflow

Limits your selection to:

 Reference curves
 Plate knuckles
 Profile knuckles
Root Plates
Limits your selection to:
 Root plate systems
 Leaf plate systems
 Designed members
 Cans
Root Profiles
Limits your selection to:
 Root stiffener systems
 Leaf stiffener systems
 Root edge reinforcement systems
 Leaf edge reinforcements systems
 Standard members
 Design members
Seams
Limits your selection to:
 Design seams
 Intersection seams
 Planning seams
 Seam points
All
Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
More
Allows you to create and select customized filters. For more information, see Select Filter
Dialog Box (on page 1282) in the Common User's Guide.

Inside Fence
Allows you to select all objects entirely inside the fence.

Overlapping Fence
Allows you to select all objects entirely inside the fence and those objects outside but
touching the fence at some point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 43

 Molded Forms Workflow

Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects

The software provides feedback on the direction, orientation, and rotation of objects using glyphs.
A glyph is a straight or curved line with a cone-shaped arrow head that indicates a particular
direction. When you are creating or modifying objects, glyphs assist you so that you can properly
set design parameters like twist, mounting angle, and offset.
The software displays glyphs for:
 Root plate systems and leaf plate systems
 Root stiffener systems and leaf stiffener systems
 Seams
 Reference curves
Glyphs display using the defined handle color as defined in Tools > Options.

Glyphs for Plate Systems

Glyphs for plate systems display at the approximate center of plate as a straight line with two
arrows. The top arrow represents the thickness direction, and the bottom arrow represents
normal direction. For example:
 Glyphs for plate systems with both thickness and normal pointing in the same direction

 Glyphs for plate systems with thickness and normal pointing in opposite directions

Glyphs for Bracket Systems

Glyphs for bracket systems display at the bracket origin for tripping brackets and at the bracket
reference position for brackets by plane. The three glyphs represent the thickness direction, the
normal direction, and the U-direction vector.

Glyphs for Profile Systems

Glyphs for profile systems display at the start point of the profile landing curve. The three glyphs
represent the profile direction, primary orientation, and angular orientation.

The profile direction glyph represents the tangent of the profile at the start point. The angular
orientation glyph represents the direction of profile orientation when a positive angle is applied for
twist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 44

 Molded Forms Workflow

Glyphs for Seams and Reference Curves

Glyphs for seams and reference curves display at the start point of the landing curve and display
the direction of the landing curve.

See Also
Molded Forms Workflow ................................................................ 28
Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer ................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer ................................................... 32
Selecting Objects ........................................................................... 40
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ............................... 45
Best Practices ................................................................................ 50
Plane Methods ............................................................................... 76
Boundary Methods ......................................................................... 80
Landing Curve Methods ................................................................. 87
Profile Orientation .......................................................................... 88
Center of Buoyancy ....................................................................... 91
Minimum Distance ......................................................................... 92

Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks

Permission groups provide controls for when, where, and by whom the model can be updated.
Permission groups are assigned according to several common types of workflow. They typically
fall into the following categories:
 By Function: such as Outfitting versus Structure, or Piping versus Equipment versus Molded
Forms versus Structural Detailing.
 By System: such as Hull versus Deck1 versus TransvBhd1. This includes the ability to place
the hull system (and its child leaf systems, seams, connections related seams, reference
curves and openings) in a different permission group than the hull detailing objects and other
connected objects.
 By Area: Fwd versus Aft, or by block or assembly.
 Combinations: for example, By Function and By Area (Molded Forms for Block1 versus
Detailing for Block1).
The permission group of an object is not modified regardless of the Active Permission Group
unless the permission group is explicitly changed on the Configuration tab of the Properties
dialog box as described under the change propagation sections below.

Molded Forms Behavior

Plate systems and profile systems are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Leaf systems, light parts, reference curves, and logical connections are assigned the permission
group of their parent.

Molded Forms User's Guide 45

 Molded Forms Workflow

Seams and openings are assigned to the permission group of the plate or profile system they cut.
You must have write access to the root plate system being cut when placing an opening or
design seam.
In the Execute Split command, seams and knuckles that you do not have permission to modify
are not selectable in the table.
Logical connections between profile systems and plate systems are in same permission group as
the profile systems.
Logical connections between different root systems are created as children of the bounded or
penetrated system.
Summary of Molded Forms permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Root plate system Active Permission Group

Leaf plate system Same as root plate system

Root and child logical Same as dependent root plate

connections system

Reference curve Same as root plate system

Design seam, intersection Same as root plate system Must have write access to
seam root plate system

Opening Same as root plate system Must have write access to

root plate system

Manual logical connection Permission group of system for Must have write access to
which you have write access, at least one of the systems
use first system selected if you being connected
have write access to both
systems

Root profile system Active Permission Group Profiles are handled

similarly to plates

Logical connection between Same permission group as root

stiffener or edge reinforcement profile system
and the plate being stiffened

Beam Active Permission Group

Molded Forms Change Propagation

The root system and its child leaf system, logical connections, reference curves, seams and
openings always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for
any of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.

Molded Forms User's Guide 46

 Molded Forms Workflow

If plate system A is bounded by plate system B, you can modify A without write access to B. Plate
System B is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if the change to A impacts B.

Structural Detailing Behavior

The detailed part permission group is not assigned from the parent system permission group.
Detailed parts created with Execute Detailing are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
You can modify this assignment. You must have write permission to the part to detail the part.
If a detailed part is deleted, the resulting light part maintains the permission group of the detailed
part.
You can assign different permission groups to parts sharing the same leaf system as created by
a planning seam.
You can only add seams and features to a part if you have write permissions to the part.
Summary of Structural Detailing permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Light Root Plate Part (before Same as plate system at

detailing) creation

Detailed Root Plate Part Active Permission Group when Must have write access to the
detailed. Part keeps this light part
permission group if the detail
part is deleted.

Leaf part Same as root part

Straking seam Same as root part Must have write access to root
part

Feature placed by command Same as root part Must have write access to root
(edge, corner, sketched, free part
edge treatment)

Assembly Connection Same as dependent part

Feature, part, physical Same as assembly connection

connection created by
assembly connection

Free end cut object and its Same as root part

features

Standalone part Active Permission Group

Molded Forms User's Guide 47

 Molded Forms Workflow

Structural Detailing Change Propagation

The detailed part, its child leaf parts, features and straking seams always have the same
permission group. Assembly connections always have the same permission group as the
dependent part in the connection. Assembly connection children always have the same
permission group as the assembly connection. Standalone parts plus associated features and
connections always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for
any of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.
If you do not have write access to a part, the part is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if a
change is made to the part. Assembly connections and features are also not created until the part
is updated on the To Do List by someone with write access.

Hole Management Behavior

Hole traces and outfitting catalog hole fittings are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Hole cuts and structural hole fittings are assigned the permission group of their parent structural
part (plate or profile).
Summary of Hole Management permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Hole trace Active Permission Group

Hole cut Same as root plate part Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Outfitting catalog hole Active Permission Group

fitting

Structural hole fitting Active Permission Group Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Hole Management Change Propagation

The permission group of an outfitting catalog hole fitting can be changed without changing the
permission group of the hole trace.
The permission group of a structural hole fitting can be changed without changing the permission
group of the hole cut or parent plate part.
A hole cut and its parent plate part always have the same permission group. When the
permission group is changed for one of these objects, the permission group is also changed for
the other object.

Planning Behavior
Planning permission group behavior is related to Molded Forms and Structural Detailing behavior
because planning seams split leaf systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 48

 Molded Forms Workflow

When Manage Intersections is run and an intersecting part is set to Split or Offset, planning
seams are created in the Active Permission Group. You must have write access to the root
system.
Summary of Planning permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Planning seam Active Permission Group Must have write access to the root system of
the parts being split.

Block or assembly Active Permission Group

Planning Change Propagation

Write access is required to both parts to remove a planning split using Flatten Assembly or
Manage Intersections. The resulting new part is assigned to the same permission group as the
original parts if they belonged to the same permission group. The new part is assigned to the
Active Permission Group if the original parts were in different permission groups.

Global Workshare Behavior

Global Workshare allows managed replication of the model at several sites. One of the
restrictions of a Workshare configuration is that you only have Read access to objects that are
controlled by non-local permission groups.
A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you are
modifying the definition of the parent system. Therefore, you must have write access to the
parent system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission groups
at the host site. The sub-system requirement to have write access to its parent system is not
possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site and the parent
system's permission group is created at the host site.
For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
named "Midbody", and its controlling permission group is in Houston. You assign John, who
works in London, write access. During the workshare replication process, the Midbody system
and permission group is replicated in London. In London, John can add systems, plates, profiles
and whatever else he wants to the Midbody system because John was given write access to the
system's permission group in Houston. John cannot delete or change any of the properties of the
Midbody system in London because the host site, Houston, owns it. He can only add objects to
the system. If John were to travel to Houston and log on there, he could delete or change any of
the properties of the Midbody system because the Houston host site owns it.

Molded Forms User's Guide 49

 Molded Forms Workflow

Best Practices
You may encounter situations where you do not know the best modeling technique. The following
best practices guide you through the modeling process. Because your modeling environment is
unique, specific instructions are not possible. However, enough detail is provided to help you
work through the solutions.

Topics
Bracket Best Practices ................................................................... 50
Knuckle Best Practices .................................................................. 56
Landing Curve Best Practices ....................................................... 56
Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings ...................................... 57
Seams Best Practices .................................................................... 60
Session File Best Practices ........................................................... 64
Sketch 2D Best Practices .............................................................. 65
Split Best Practices ........................................................................ 74

Bracket Best Practices

Bracket Plate System creates plate systems for primary structural brackets that can be
stiffened, penetrated by stiffeners on the bounding structure, and split with design seams. Use
the following best practices when working with the command. For more information, see Bracket
Plate System (on page 227).

Backside support
When a support is on the backside of another plate, select the edge of the support. Selecting the
system results in an error.
The following example shows a bracket with the backside edge of a plate as one of the supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 50

 Molded Forms Workflow

1. Select the desk plate system as Support 1.

2. The second support is a bulkhead on the backside of another bulkhead. Using QuickPick,
select the edge of second support as Support 2. Do not select the plate system.

Length value and bracket parameters

When the supports are non-linear or non-planer, select a value for Length that is closest to or
greater than bracket height and width parameters.

Ambiguity in a bracket support

When a bracket support has an ambiguity, select the correct side of the ambiguity.

Molded Forms User's Guide 51

 Molded Forms Workflow

The following example shows a bracket that is on the far side of the bulkhead.

1. Select the bulkhead plate system as Support 1.

Molded Forms User's Guide 52

 Molded Forms Workflow

2. Select the far side of the profile system as Support 2.

Bracket thickness
When modifying the secondary orientation of a lapped bracket profile support, also modify the
bracket thickness direction so that the bracket is properly lapped.
In the following example, a lapped bracket is placed on a profile system, and the secondary
orientation of the profile system is modified.

1. Select the profile system you want to modify and click Properties .
2. Select Section Orientation and modify Secondary Orientation as needed.
3. Click Finish.
The orientation of the profile system is modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 53

 Molded Forms Workflow

4. Check if the lapped bracket thickness direction is correct.

5. If the lapped bracket thickness direction is incorrect, select the bracket and click Properties
.
6. Select Molded Conventions and modify the Thickness Direction as needed.

Molded Forms brackets versus Structural Detailing brackets

When a bracket must be penetrated, split, stiffened, or is needed for strength calculations (in an
external analysis tool) or class drawings, use Bracket Plate System in Molded Forms
instead of Place Bracket Parts in Structural Detailing.

Bracket symbols
Use a bracket symbol instead of a sketched bracket when a profile is a support and minimum
height of the bracket nose is important. The nose height is not maintained on a sketched bracket
when the profile height is modified.

Create multiple brackets using Auto Finish Mode

When you want to create multiple brackets with the same symbol and common supports, use
Auto Finish Mode .
The following example shows a plate system with multiple two-support and three-support
brackets created using Auto Finish Mode .

1 - Two-support bracket
2 - Three-support bracket

Molded Forms User's Guide 54

 Molded Forms Workflow

1. For a two-support bracket, select the plate system as Support 1.

2. Select Support 2 and click Auto Finish Mode to create two-support brackets each time
you select a similar Support 2.
3. For a three-support bracket, use Bracket Shape.
4. Select the plate system as Support 1.
5. Select similar Support 2 and Support 3 each time you want to create a three-support
bracket.

1 - Support 2 for
two-support bracket
2 - Support 2 for
three-support bracket
3 - Support 3 for
three-support bracket

Logical connection
When the bracket supports are not loaded in the workspace, you can identify the supports by the
bracket logical connections in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 55

 Molded Forms Workflow

Knuckle Best Practices

You can use different methods to split larger plate and profile systems into smaller subsystems
for detailed design and manufacturing. However, when using a knuckle instead of a split, follow
these best practices.
 Do not use seams to split knuckles.
 Do not create seams too close to a knuckle curve or point. Seam creation fails if the knuckle
is closer than 5mm.
 Do not delete a knuckled reference curve.
 When a knuckle reference curve transitions to a tangent, check that it also connects to
another seam.

 When you have a plate bend, such as a flanged plate that is concave (thickness direction is
toward the center of the radius), ensure that the radius is equal to or smaller than the plate
thickness.
See Also
Placing Plate Systems (on page 96)
Placing Profile Systems (on page 721)
Creating Seams (on page 888)
Creating Reference Curves (on page 972)

Landing Curve Best Practices

Landing curves are defined when creating profile systems, seams, and reference curves by
projection. When creating landing curves, use the following best practices. For more information,
see Landing Curve Methods (on page 87).
 Avoid multi-lump (non-continuous) landing curves. For example, profiles crossing openings
or openings cutting profiles are not valid.
 Do not define landing curves that overlap or are collinear.
 When placing profiles by projection, the default profile type depends on the selected
sketching plane. This may not be the intended type. For example, when creating longitudinal
profiles with a transverse sketch plane, the default type is Transverse. Check the type on the
Properties dialog box, and modify it if needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 56

 Molded Forms Workflow

 When placing profiles or seams by projection, extend the landing curves beyond the
expected plate boundary or surface edges. If the geometry of the surface changes, then the
landing curves are be long enough. The recommended extension is approximately 1 meter.
 When placing profiles or seams by offset, do not use an offset value of zero.
 When placing profiles or seams by projection that are to be bounded, extend the sketch curve
past the boundaries in Sketch 2D and then set boundaries in 3D.
Also See
Placing Profile Systems (on page 721)
Creating Seams (on page 888)
Creating Reference Curves (on page 972)

Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings

This best practice illustrates how to model interior openings as sketched boundaries and include
the decks that define the base of the openings in the bulkhead boundary list, allowing the
transverse bulkhead to be modeled as one plate system.
You want to create a transverse bulkhead as one plate system, which is split by the decks and
longitudinal bulkheads, and contains large openings outboard of longitudinal bulkheads. The
challenge in modeling the transverse bulkhead is how to model the openings. If you create an
opening, the base of the opening is coincident with the intersection seam, which sometimes
causes detailing to fail.

Instead of using Place Opening to model the openings, model the interior openings as
sketched boundaries and include the decks that define the base of the openings in the bulkhead
boundary list. The transverse bulkhead to be modeled as one plate system.
The following example uses sketched boundaries to create interior openings that are coincident
with intersection seam:

Molded Forms User's Guide 57

 Molded Forms Workflow

1. Import the hull using Imported Plate System (on page 130) .
2. Assuming grid planes that are 1 meter apart, create decks D3, D21, D30, and D35, bounded
by the hull and reference frames x = 40 and 60M, using Planar Plate System (on page 99)
.
3. Create longitudinal bulkheads L10 and L-10, bounded by the hull and the D35 deck system,
also using the Planar Plate System command.
4. Using Planar Plate System , create a transverse bulkhead at F50:
a. Set Continuity to Intercostal.
b. As the boundaries, select the hull, D21, D30, and D35, and then click Sketch Boundary
Curve .

c. Click Add Intersecting Item and select bulkheads L10 and L-10.
d. Draw the opening boundaries as shown.

e. Click Finish.
The software starts the Ambiguity Solver. Three cells are presented (between hull and
D21, between D21 and D30 and between D30 and D35).
f. Select all three cells, and then click Finish again.

Molded Forms User's Guide 58

 Molded Forms Workflow

The bulkhead is created as shown.

5. Run Execute Split .

The software creates the 12 leaf systems and all the logical connections.

At this point you can detail the parts, create the manufacturing parts, add design seams to the
bulkhead, and place edge reinforcement on the free edges of the sketched boundaries. You can
also modify the sketched boundaries to have round corners:

Molded Forms User's Guide 59

 Molded Forms Workflow

Seams Best Practices

By using a seam object, you can split a plate system into separate child plate subsystems. A
seam is always attached to one or more plate systems. Use the following best practices when
working with seams. For more information, see Creating Seams (on page 888).

Avoid overlapping or coincident seams

Do not place seams that overlap. Overlapping seams can cause trimming issues. In the following
example, two seams overlap.

Instead, place a single seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 60

 Molded Forms Workflow

Avoid seam boundaries at tangent points

Seams at tangent points can cause problems when detailing. Do not place separate seams.

Instead, place a single seam to avoid seam boundaries at tangent points.

Avoid seams that are coincident with system boundaries

To avoid weld and other detailing issues, do not place seams that coincide with the system
boundary.
In the following example, a seam from point b to point c is not required and makes detailing and
trimming of the plate difficult.

Molded Forms User's Guide 61

 Molded Forms Workflow

1 - Seam coinciding with the plate boundary

Instead, place the seam only from point a to point b.

Avoid seams that end in the middle of the plate

To avoid detailing problems, do not place seams that do not completely split the plate. Place a
seam across the plate touching the plate edges.

Seams by projection on non-planar plate systems

When you place a seam by projection on non-planar plate systems, extend the ends of the seam
past the plate boundaries.

Seams by projection
When you place a seam by projection, connect the elements in Sketch 2D when the seam
consists of multiple elements.

Split the intersection seam before creating a design seam

Split an intersection seam before creating a design seam that is bounded to the intersection
seam.
In the following example, only a part of the plate is required to be cut. If the design seam is
created without splitting the intersection seam, then the complete plate is split by the design

Molded Forms User's Guide 62

 Molded Forms Workflow

seam. If you split the profile seam first, then a design seam can be created that ends at the profile
edge.
Split the profile to create the intersection seam, and then create the design seam and bound it to
the intersection seam.

Closed edge reinforcements with seams must have at least two seams
You need to create at least two profile seams on a closed-edge reinforcement. For example,
create one seam on the port side and the other on the starboard side. Select Auto Split and
select the port solution to solve the ambiguity.

Continuous and intercostal seams

Create longer continuous seams before creating shorter intercostal seams. This helps in detailing
and reduces ambiguity.

Modifying the seam geometry causes the seam to re-split

When you modify seam geometry, the software reruns the splitting operation on the seam. This
might affect the objects that intersect with it. Plan seams carefully and proceed with caution if you
need to modify a seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 63

 Molded Forms Workflow

Session File Best Practices

A session file is a standard workspace file used to save settings from one work session to the
next, such as settings for windows, default colors, Sketch 2D, and units of measure. Use the
following best practices when working with session files. For more information, see Managing
Sessions in the Common User's Guide.

Save Session Files

 After restoring new databases from a backup, open the model, make necessary setting
changes, and save new session files.
 Save a session file after making significant changes, such as splitting blocks and detailing
structure. This minimizes the refresh time the next time you open the model from the session
file.
 You cannot save a session file if you run out of memory or the session quits abnormally.
Re-open the session file and refresh the workspace to restore. If new objects are not defined
in a filter, browse the database and add the objects to the filter.

Global Workshare
 When working in a global workshare environment, refresh the workspace after opening a
session file.

Share session files

When sharing a session file, define the session file with catalog or model filters. You must have
appropriate permissions to create or modify catalog filters and model filters. For more information,
see Permission Group Tab and Permissions Overview in the Common User's Guide.
 Catalog filters are used like reference data in the catalog. A catalog filter applies to
company-wide operations. For example, your administrator can define filters such as
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2.
 Model filters are available to everyone assigned to a specific database model.
 Delivered catalog filters query different types of model objects.
 You must have appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete model and catalog filters.
Do not create model filters at a satellite site.
For more information, see Define Workspace in the Common User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 64

 Molded Forms Workflow

Sketch 2D Best Practices

The Sketch 2D option is used in several commands to create sketched boundaries,
openings, curves for extruded plate systems, and profile and seam landing curves. The following
Sketch 2D best practices help you create objects in Molded Forms that you detail in the
Structural Detailing task and manufacture in the Structural Manufacturing task.

Templates
Sketch 2D default display options are saved in the file [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\template.sha. You can change the default display by
changing options in this file:
1. Right-click template.sha and select Properties.
2. Clear Read-only and click OK.
3. Open template.sha and change any of the following default display options:
 File > Properties. You can change the units displayed in command ribbon bars on the
Units tab.
 View > Toolbars. You can select the toolbars that are displayed.
 Format > Dimensions. You can change the units used in dimensions, the text size, and
other dimension properties.
 Tools > Options. You can change the default colors on the Colors tab.
 Tools > Display Manager. You can change the default geometry color, line type, and
width for individual layers.
 Tools > SmartSketch Settings. You can select the SmartSketch relationships that are
enabled on the Relationships tab.
4. Save and close the file.

Fractional Units
The default units and precision values in Sketch 2D are defined in a 3D task. For example, if the
file [Product Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\template.sha has default units set to mm,
and the units of measure in Molded Forms are set to ft-in, Sketch 2D defines the units of
measurement as ft-in.
The Properties dialog box in Sketch 2D allows you to view the defined units of measurement
and to specify the fractional precision value. If you need to use a specific fractional precision
value for all tasks in Sketch 2D, you can specify the precision value in the template file, which
takes precedence over the precision value defined by the 3D task.
The following example shows how to modify the length readout precision to 1/64 in the template
file:
1. In the template.sha file, set the precision value to 1/64, and save the file.
2. In the Molded Forms task, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
3. Under Units of Measure, set the distance readout to ft-in (fractional).
4. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 65

 Molded Forms Workflow

The distance units in Sketch 2D are now in ft-in with a precision value of 1/64.

Number of sketch files allowed per plate

Sketch 2D geometry for an object is saved in 2D files cached in the model and related to the
object.
The Boundary Curve step for the plate system commands uses one 2D file. All boundary
curves are in one 2D file for each plate system, and are modified, added, or deleted in the same
file.

The Place Opening , Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection , and Design Seam by
2D Sketch commands can each have:
 Multiple 2D files, with a separate file for each object on one plate system. The objects are
modified in the 2D file, and deleted from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.
 Geometry for multiple objects in one 2D file. The objects are modified or deleted in the 2D file.
 One 2D file that applies to multiple plate systems. Changes to the 2D file are reflected on all
plate systems.
 A combination of these files.

Add items to sketch

The Add Intersecting Item and Add Projection Item steps are used to add reference
structure to Sketch 2D. Select the minimum number of needed items.
More than 30 items added to a sketch file can slow down software performance when
the object is recomputed.
Next, you can select Auto to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to the current select set. Items that pass the criteria are added to the select set and are
highlighted in the graphic view, as well as the Workspace Explorer.
The filter criteria that the software uses to determine eligible candidates depend upon whether
Add Intersecting Item or Add Projection Item was selected in a previous step. The following
table lists the various relevant objects that are automatically imported based on the target, or
base sketch, object type.

Base Sketch Object Intersecting Objects Projecting Objects

Plate System  Stiffeners  Reference Curves

 Edge Reinforcements  Stiffeners
 Seams  Penetration Plates
 Bounded Objects
 Bounding Objects
 Knuckle Reference Curves

Plate Part None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Profile System None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Member None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Molded Forms User's Guide 66

 Molded Forms Workflow

Designed Member (Built Up) Same as Plate System Same as Plate System

If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a message on the status bar.
If you clear Auto, all selected objects, whether added to the select set automatically or manually,
are cleared. Selecting Auto adds back those objects that initially passed the filter criteria, but it
does not add back any objects that you selected manually.
When the selected plate system is large, Auto automatically adds all objects
relative to the sketch in the context of intersecting or project. This can slow down software
performance.

Layers
The software automatically defines several layers in Sketch 2D. Reference items (selected
automatically by the software or manually using the Add Intersecting Item and Add
Projection Item steps) are placed on those layers:

Default Layer
The software only uses geometry that you create on the Default layer. You can put other
geometry, such as construction lines, on other layers. The Default layer must be the first layer
alphabetically. To avoid a conflict, you should add a "z" prefix to any layer which you add, such
as "z_construction."

Infinite Elements Layer

Contains reference items with infinite geometry intersecting the sketch plane, such as grid planes.
Objects on this layer can be used with dimensions and relationships.

Inputs Layer
Contains other reference items intersecting the sketch plane that can also be used with
dimensions and relationships. The reference geometry includes openings, design seams, plate
systems, and profile systems.

No_Constrained_Elements Layer
Contains reference items that do not intersect the sketch plane. Also contains reference items
that cannot be used with relationships and dimensions, such as plate and profile parts. By default,
you cannot select reference geometry on the No_Constrained_Elements layer. To make the
geometry selectable, you must make No_Constrained_Elements the active layer, and then
switch back to the Default layer.
You can add relationships and dimensions to reference geometry on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer, but the relationships are not saved when you click Finish.

Multiple reference planes

You can add reference planes to Sketch 2D that are different than the sketching plane, but
parallel to the sketching plane. This is useful in defining landing curves for projected profiles and
seams on the hull. Use Add Projection Item to add the reference planes.

Molded Forms User's Guide 67

 Molded Forms Workflow

The additional reference plane intersection geometry is gray in color and placed on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer.

Using SmartSketch Drawing Editor to save sketch geometry

SmartSketch Drawing Editor, delivered to [Product Folder]\Shape2D\Bin\shape2dserver.exe,
can be used to save geometry commonly used in Sketch 2D, such as:
 Mother curves and extrusion curves for extruded plate systems.
 Boundary curves.
 Openings or sketched features not included in the Catalog.
 Landing curves for projected profiles and seams.
You can copy the geometry from Sketch 2D and paste it into SmartSketch Drawing Editor, or
create the geometry directly in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Geometry can be saved in multiple
SmartSketch Drawing Editor files or into a single file with multiple sheets. The geometry can be
copied from SmartSketch Drawing Editor and pasted into Sketch 2D as needed.

Deleting reference geometry

You can delete reference geometry from the sketch when the software includes geometry that
you do not want to see. The reference structure is not deleted, and the reference geometry is
recreated the next time that you open the sketch.

Modifying groups of geometry

The software automatically groups Sketch 2D geometry when you click Finish. When you modify
the existing 2D geometry of an object, you must maintain the original group identifier by using the
following methods:
1. To modify or delete existing geometry, use QuickPick, Top Down or Bottom Up
with Select Tool to select the geometry instead of the group.
2. To add new geometry to a group, use Edit > Group Modify.
3. To replace all geometry in a group with geometry copied to the clipboard, use Replace
Group Elements .

Molded Forms User's Guide 68

 Molded Forms Workflow

Rectangles
Use Line or Line/Arc Continuous to create rectangles.
If you use Rectangle , you must select Tools > Maintain Relationships. Right-click the
geometry, and then select Convert. This converts the rectangle into four lines and the correct
connection relationships are created at the corners.

Constraints
Use relationships and dimensions to constrain geometry to reference structure. This keeps the
geometry properly related to the reference structure if the reference structure changes.
Keep relationships and dimensions as simple as possible. This allows the geometry the best
chance to update if the reference structure changes.

Connections
Connection relationships are required for the software to create connected geometry.
Do not create a connection between the corner of the sketched geometry, and the corner of the
bounding object. Instead, move the constraint slightly off the corner.
Good: All endpoints of opening are connected.

Bad: Missing connection at one corner causes the creation of the opening to fail.

Molded Forms User's Guide 69

 Molded Forms Workflow

Good: All endpoints of extrusion curve are connected.

Bad: Missing connection on extrusion curve.

Plate system is missing part of the curve.

Extending sketch geometry to intersect bounding structure

Extend sketch geometry beyond bounding reference structure geometry to ensure that the
sketch geometry intersects the reference structure at all locations.
Good:

Molded Forms User's Guide 70

 Molded Forms Workflow

Extrusion curve extends beyond the hull. Bracket boundary curve extends
beyond the top flange and the
bottom of the bottom flange.

Bad:

Overlapping sketch geometry for boundary curves

A boundary curve with all geometry connected is treated as one edge in the Graphics View. You
may sometimes want parts of the curve to be treated as separate edges at sharp discontinuities
such as corners. This allows you to add edge reinforcements in the Molded Forms task or edge
treatments in the Structural Detailing task to part of the boundary curve without defining
additional boundaries. In order to separate the boundary curve into separate edges, overlap the
boundary curve geometry instead of connecting it at the corners:

Molded Forms User's Guide 71

 Molded Forms Workflow

Creating boundary curves on the thickness side of a plate

If your plate boundaries include a plate system with the thickness direction towards the plate that
you are creating, a profile mounted to the bounding plate system and a sketched boundary, and
then the boundary curve must intersect both the profile system and profile part.
In the following example:
 The solid blue line is the molded surface of the bounding plate system.
 The dashed blue line is the thickness direction for the bounding plate part.
 The dashed gray profile outline is the bounding profile system mounted to the bounding plate
system at the molded surface (on the No_Constrained_Elements layer).
 The dashed blue profile outline is the bounding profile part mounted to the thickened
bounding plate part.
 The solid black line is the intended boundary curve intersecting the profile part.
 The solid red line is the required adjustment to the boundary curve, passing through both the
profile part and profile system, and intersecting the profile system.

The black line is the intended boundary curve. It can be constrained to the dashed blue profile
part using relationships and dimensions. The red lines are additional geometry that must connect
to the black boundary curve, pass through the profile part geometry, and intersect the dashed
grey profile system geometry.

Arcs in boundary curves

If a boundary curve ends with a circular or elliptical arc, you must add a line segment pointing
away from the direction of the arc. This prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve as the curve is calculated.
In the following example, the black curves are the intended boundary curve. The red line is the
extension to the boundary curve that prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 72

 Molded Forms Workflow

Multiple curves
Do not create a close boundary curve contour that overlaps trimming input geometry. Instead,
draw two separate curves. In the following example, there are two separate curves, one for
corner feature and one for diagonal boundary.

1 - Corner feature curve

2 - Diagonal boundary curve

Associative offsets
The Associative Offset command allows you to create a curve based on an existing curve, and
place the new curve at a specified offset. To use this command, you must add it to a toolbar.
1. Right-click an existing toolbar, and click Toolbars.
2. Click Customize on the Toolbars dialog box.
3. Click Manipulation on the Categories list.
4. Drag the Associative Offset icon from the Buttons list to an existing toolbar.
For more information on the Associative Offset command see the Associative Offset
Command topics in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor help file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 73

 Molded Forms Workflow

Split Best Practices

Execute Split divides large plate and profile systems into smaller subsystems. The systems
can be split by intersection and design seams. Execute Split automatically creates intersection
seam at the intersection of two objects. Use the following best practices when working with the
command. For more information, see Execute Split (on page 891).

Continuities and priorities

After you place a plate or a profile, specify continuity and priority before splitting.
1. Select plate or profile system. You can select more than one system if they are to have the
same continuity and priority.

2. Click Properties on the ribbon bar.

3. On the Main tab, specify Continuity and Priority.
4. Click OK.
Continuity defines how the object reacts when it intersects another object. Select Continuous to
indicate that the object penetrates the other object. Select Intercostal to indicate that the object
is penetrated by the other object.
Priority specifies which object is penetrated when two similar objects with the same continuity
value intersect. An object with a lower continuity priority (for example, 1, 2, or 3) penetrates other
object with a higher continuity priority (for example, 7, 8, or 9).

Design seams
Split intercostal structure with continuous structure before placing design seams on the
intercostal structure. For best performance, create all design seams, and then execute split
before detailing for best performance.

Review the Split List

Each object by default is set as a split (intercostal) or splitter (continuous) object based on the
continuity and priority properties you specify.

Molded Forms User's Guide 74

 Molded Forms Workflow

1. If a row in the split list is highlighted in red, there is ambiguity in the split-splitter relationship.
Modify the continuity and priority properties of the objects as needed.
2. Click Invert to swap split and splitter objects.
3. Click Finish after reviewing the list.
Split the objects in batches rather splitting entire objects at the same time. Splitting
early and often reduces the computation time.

Splitting late in design

When modifying or creating a split after detailing, many parts are affected. In this case, use the
following workflow:
1. Turn on Delay Struct Detailing
a. Go to Tools > Delay Settings.
b. On the Delay Setting tab, select Delay Struct Detailing.
c. Click Apply, and close the dialog box.
2. Split
a. Select the objects to split or a split to modify.

b. Click Execute Split .

c. Review the split list as needed, and then click Finish.
3. Turn off Delay Struct Detailing
a. Go to Tools > Delay Settings.
b. On the Delay Setting tab, clear Delay Struct Detailing.
c. Click Apply.
4. Update
a. On the Update To Do Records tab, click Update Objects.
b. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Un-Split
Use Un-split command to remove a split. You can use the seam that caused the split again at a
later time.
1. Select Tools > Un-Split from the menu.

2. Click Select on the ribbon.

3. Select the seam that caused the split to undo.
4. Click Un-Split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 75

 Molded Forms Workflow

Plane Methods
You must often define planes used for object surfaces and sketching planes. Usually, but not
necessarily, these planes are based from an existing plate or from a grid or reference plane
created using the Grids task. The following methods define planes:
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

What do you want to do?

 Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
 Define an offset plane (on page 77)
 Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
 Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
 Move a defined plane (on page 80)

Define a coincident plane

1. Click Offset from a Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar
plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

Molded Forms User's Guide 76

 Molded Forms Workflow

3. Check that Offset Lock is locked and that the Offset value is 0.

 You create reference planes in the Grids task by selecting Ship in the Grid Type box of the
Grid Wizard. For this plane method, you can select reference planes in the Workspace
Explorer or in a graphic view.

 You create grid planes in the Grids task by selecting Grids in the Grid Type box of the Grid
Wizard. For this plane method, you can best select grid planes in the Workspace Explorer.

 For more information, see Create Coordinate System (Grid Wizard) in the Grids User's
Guide.

Define an offset plane

1. Click Offset from a Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to offset the new
plane. The base plane can be a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

3. In the Offset box, type the offset distance from the plane and press TAB.
The plane moves to the new location.
-OR-
4. Graphically define the offset:

Molded Forms User's Guide 77

 Molded Forms Workflow

a. Click Offset Lock .

The option changes to unlocked .

b. Move the pointer to the required location and click.

The plane and plane coordinate system move to the new location, Offset Lock
changes to locked , and the offset value displays in the Offset box.
c. If an adjustment to the offset is needed, type a new value in the Offset box.
5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane (on page
80).

 You can graphically define the offset with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For more
information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.
 By moving the pointer back and forth over the base plane in the graphic view, you can
change the offset direction. You can also change the direction by changing the sign in the
Offset box.
 When Offset Lock is set to locked , the Offset value does not change when the pointer
moves.

Define a plane using a point and a normal vector

1. Click Plane by Point and Vector .
2. Select a vector in the model that is normal to the required plane. The vector can be any
linear geometry that is part of the construction of a model object, such as a plate system
edge or a profile system landing curve. Use QuickPick to select a line geometry element.

3. Click the Line geometry element.

The selected geometry highlights in yellow.

Molded Forms User's Guide 78

 Molded Forms Workflow

4. Move the cursor to a point that is on the required plane, and then click.
A preview of the plane and its local U_V_N coordinate system displays. The plane is
coincident with the point and normal to the vector.

5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane (on page
80).
You can graphically define the point with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For
more information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.

Define a plane using three points

1. Click Plane by Three Points .
2. Specify on the first point that defines the plane.

3. Specify the second point that defines the plane.

4. Specify the third point that defines the plane.

 You can define points on the surfaces, edges, and corners of systems and parts. You can
control the types of points by using Tools > Options. For more information, see SmartSketch
Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
 You can define points on grid planes, especially at intersections.

You can control the types of points using Tools > Options. For more information, see
SmartSketch Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
In Molded Forms, define parametric points by using Insert > Topological Points. For more
information, see Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323).

Molded Forms User's Guide 79

 Molded Forms Workflow

Move a defined plane

1. Click Maintain Plane Relationships to disable relationships used to create the plane.
2. Click Move Plane .
The pointer changes to a plus symbol, and the origin point of the local U-V-N coordinate
system for the plane moves to the pointer.

3. Move the pointer to the required location, and then click.

The local U-V-N coordinate system and the plane display in the new location.

You can move the plane with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For more
information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.

Boundary Methods
You must often define boundaries when creating plate systems, profiles, edge reinforcements,
and other objects. The common methods for defining boundaries are:

Pick Boundaries
Define boundaries by selecting them graphically either in a graphics view or in the
Workspace Explorer.
Pick Edges
This option is only available if you pick a plate as a boundary. Select the plate edges to use.
Click Pick Boundaries to exit the Pick Edges option and select other boundaries.

Boundary List
Define boundaries by selecting them from a list of potential boundaries. For more information,

Molded Forms User's Guide 80

 Molded Forms Workflow

see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Define the boundary by drawing its shape.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.

What do you want to do?

 Pick boundaries (on page 81)
 Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 81)
 Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
 Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
 Rebound objects (on page 1391)

Pick boundaries
1. Click Pick Boundaries .
2. In a graphic view or Workspace Explorer, select an object or grid plane to use as a
boundary.
3. Continue selecting objects or grid planes until you have completed defining the boundaries
for the object.
To remove an object from the group of boundaries, select the object again.

Use the Boundary List dialog box

1. On the command ribbon, click Boundary List .
The Boundary List dialog box displays.
2. To remove a boundary, select the boundary in the list, and then click Remove .

3. To remove all boundaries, click Remove All .

4. To add a new boundary, click Add , and then select a boundary in the graphic view or in
the Workspace Explorer. You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value
in the Offset box or the Name box.
For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 81

 Molded Forms Workflow

Define a boundary curve

1. Select Boundary Curve .
2. Define the sketching plane for the curve.
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define plane using angle from plane
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
Define plane by vectors normal

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane and that you want to use
as reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
appear in the 2D environment.
7. Select Auto to automatically add all related objects to the select set, if needed.

8. Click Sketch 2D .
The 2D environment appears.
9. In the 2D environment, sketch the boundary.
You can constrain the boundary to geometric construction points referenced from
profile cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point
at Offset from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
10. Click Finish in the 2D environment.
The 3D environment and the main command ribbon return.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment also removes it from the
Boundary List dialog box.

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries

The command switches to Solve Ambiguity automatically if an ambiguous solution exists
after clicking Accept or Finish. All possible solutions created by the selected boundaries
appear in the graphic view.
1. Move the pointer over a solution, and then click to select it.
2. Continue to select solutions until you have defined the entire bounded object. A correct
solution to ambiguity meets these conditions:
 Each solution must have a common edge with at least one other solution.
 Each boundary must be used by at least one solution.

Molded Forms User's Guide 82

 Molded Forms Workflow

 To modify the ambiguous solution after creating an object, select Solve Ambiguity , and
select new solutions.
 To remove a previously-selected solution, select the solution again.
 Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a boundary
plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.

Boundary List Dialog Box

Displays the boundaries for the object that you are placing:
 Model objects, such as plate systems or profile systems.
 Reference planes and other plane definitions.

 Sketched boundary curves created using the Sketch 2D option on a supported ribbon.
Boundary curves are prefixed with SketchGroup_.
 A standalone plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation when a boundary was
not included in the operation. You usually want to replace the standalone plane with a new
boundary.

Open this dialog box by clicking Boundary List on the command ribbon during the boundary
definition step.
Preview Type
You can press ARROW DOWN and ARROW UP to step through the boundary list. Each
selected boundary highlights in the graphic view according to the selected preview type.
Tools > Options defines the Highlight color. For more information, see Colors Tab (Options
Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
In the following examples, two plate systems, a reference plane, and a sketched boundary
are the selected boundaries of the vertical plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 83

 Molded Forms Workflow

Bounding Objects - Highlights the selected boundary object as an outline. Reference

planes display as translucent shaded planes.

Bounding Geometry - Highlights the internal boundary geometry used by the software. The
internal geometry is typically an unlimited length line for model objects and reference plane
boundaries.

Molded Forms User's Guide 84

 Molded Forms Workflow

Edges - Highlights edges of the bounded object where the bounded object intersects with the
selected boundary.

For Bounding Objects and Bounding Geometry, the complete sketched

boundary curve geometry displays as drawn in Sketch 2D , as shown in the following
example.

Add
Specifies a new boundary. You can select a boundary in the graphic view or the Workspace
Explorer.

 You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value in the Name box or
the Offset box, and then press TAB or ENTER.
 Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Remove
Removes the selected boundary from the list.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment (Sketch 2D on the main
command ribbon) also removes it from the Boundary List dialog box.

Clear All
Removes all boundaries from the list.

Molded Forms User's Guide 85

 Molded Forms Workflow

/ Disconnect
Removes the relationships of a boundary to its definition method. When you disconnect a
boundary, it becomes a standalone plane. This option is active by default for a standalone
plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation.
After disconnecting a boundary, you must select a replacement boundary in the
graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.

Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View

Extends a sketched boundary to a point in space or to another element selected in the
graphic view. This option is available when you select a sketched boundary (with a name
prefixed with SketchGroup_).
Name
Specifies the name of a boundary.
Offset
Specifies an offset distance from the boundary. You can type the following formats for offset
values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m
Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Apply
Displays a preview of the boundaries in the graphic view.
Gaps between boundaries display with a glyph.

The glyph uses the Handle color defined in Tools > Options. For more information, see
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
OK
Closes the dialog box and saves the boundary changes.
To cancel boundary changes, you must click OK and then exit the parent
command without clicking Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 86

 Molded Forms Workflow

Landing Curve Methods

You must often create landing curves when creating profile systems and seams by projection.
Landing curves are sometimes based on existing grid planes created with the Grids task. There
are two methods for defining the landing curve:

Define using 2D Sketcher

Defines a landing curve by projecting a 2D curve that is sketched onto the plate systems.
Landing Curve Definition by 3D
Defines a 3D geometric construction landing curve by creating a curve through a set of points,
a set of curves on the plate system, or a surface intersecting the plate system. For more
information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Landing Curve Best Practices (on page 56)

What do you want to do?

 Define landing curve by 2D (on page 87)
 Define landing curve by 3D (on page 88)

Define landing curve by 2D

1. Click Define using 2D Sketcher .
2. Define a sketching plane using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. Sketch the 2D stiffener profile landing curve that you want the software to project onto the
plate system that you are stiffening. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on
page 65).
You can constrain the landing curve to geometric construction points offset from
plate systems. For more information, see Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
9. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 87

 Molded Forms Workflow

Define landing curve by 3D

You can create the landing curve by using a variety of macros available in the
Geometric Construction Palette dialog box. The following procedure provides an example.
1. On the Stiffener Profile System by Projection ribbon, click Landing Curve Definition by
3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.
2. In the Points tab of the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, select a point macro,
and create the needed geometric construction points.
3. Click Continue.
The Geometric Construction Explorer shows a list of points.
4. In the Curves tab, select the CurveByPointsOnSurface macro, and create the curve.
5. Click Continue.
The curve is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. Click Close.

Profile Orientation
You must often define the orientation of stiffener profiles. A profile has a linear or twisted
orientation and can be divided into multiple regions, each having a different orientation. The
following options are available to define profile orientation:
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment

Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:
 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 88

 Molded Forms Workflow

 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.

 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest
to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 89

 Molded Forms Workflow

 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table

Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.
See Also
Molded Forms Workflow (on page 28)

Molded Forms User's Guide 90

 Molded Forms Workflow

Center of Buoyancy
The center of buoyancy of an object is located at the center of the volume of the liquid that the
object displaces. It is the point through which the upward buoyant force acts.
The following diagram shows a rectangular form floating in water. The center of gravity (point 1)
is at the geometric center of the shape. The center of buoyancy (point 2) is at the center of the
volume of the displaced water.

1 - Center of Gravity
2 - Center of Buoyancy

For a ship, there is no single center of buoyancy value. Rather, there is a center of buoyancy for
every floating position of the ship. This includes both non-heeled and heeled conditions up to and
including the design draft (the maximum submerged floating position). Normally, calculations are
done for a range of drafts at the 0° heeled state. These are reported in a tabular form or depicted
graphically on a drawing along with other computed values. The collection of these values is
commonly referred to as Hydrostatics.
Smart 3D does not directly calculate the center of buoyancy. The data used to compute the
center of buoyancy of a ship is provided by the hull plate system. Because a ship is designed to
meet conditions of performance (speed, carrying capacity, and so on) the hull form shape is
usually developed before the three-dimensional model is started. Usually, the three-dimensional
model is built based on preliminary hull designs.
Smart 3D allows you to use the third-party hull design tool that best meets your needs to create
this preliminary design. You can then import that hull form as either an Initial Graphics Exchange
Standard (IGES) file or a Standard ACIS Text (SAT) file. For more information, see Import ACIS
(File Menu) (on page 1216) and Import IGES (File Menu) (on page 1216).
For floating offshore structures, there may be multiple hull plate systems, such as the pontoons
and columns on semi-submersibles.
The tubular legs and braces of offshore jacket structures can be treated as hulls for floating
calculations after the jacket is launched and positioned and before it is flooded. In these cases,
you must know which structural objects are designed to be watertight and which are not. Smart
3D allows you to set properties on plate systems to indicate their tightness.
Smart 3D allows you to query structural system objects in the model database for the type (such
as hull, deck, transverse bulkhead, longitudinal bulkhead, tube, and so on) as well as for their
tightness (such as watertight, non-tight, weather tight, airtight, and so on). Such a query helps to
identify which objects contribute to determining a center of buoyancy. These objects must be
defined by the designer creating the model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 91

 Molded Forms Workflow

You must know what objects contribute to the floating position, the density of the fluid (salt or
fresh water), the weight and center of gravity, and which objects are going to produce buoyant
forces before you can calculate the center of buoyancy.
Calculations of this nature, and use of the computed data, are very specialized. They are done by
professionals and experts in the field of naval architecture. Thicknesses of the structural
members, such as pipes and tubes, have one volume when they are not flooded (volume of outer
diameter) and another when they are flooded (volume of inner diameter). Submerged objects
must take into account the volume of the structure itself because the net volume is what
determines the actual buoyancy. Intergraph assumes no liability for use of data from Smart 3D for
this purpose.
The three-dimensional model is built from early designs and it is rare to take a 3D model and try
to compute these values. Intergraph recommends that you contact the group or company that
was responsible for the design to get this type of data.

Minimum Distance
Minimum height or distances are maintained for plate systems with sketched boundaries and
mother curves, profiles by projection, seams by projections, sketched openings, and stand-alone
plate parts with sketched boundaries.
Minimum distances for sketched openings on plate systems are not supported.
The software maintains the minimum height when the plate part is detailed in the Structural
Detailing task. For example, if the sketched boundary is on the molded side of the bounding plate,
then the minimum distance is maintained.

If the sketched boundary is on the thickness side of the bounding plate, then the sketched
boundary is adjusted to compensate for thickness. For example, if the sketch is constrained to
the molded side, the results are as follows:

If the sketch is adjusted to the near side, the results would be as follows:

Molded Forms User's Guide 92

 Molded Forms Workflow

If the plate thickness is different along the length of the bounded plate, the minimum distance is
applied using the plate thickness where the sketched boundary crosses the plate system. The
results are as follows:

If the plate is defined with a sketched boundary that is not normal to the bounding plate, then the
software addresses any long point - short point issues. The minimum distance is maintained on
the shortest side, either the molded or anti- molded side.

In non-planar cases, the minimum distance is maintained measured along the plate surface
instead of in the sketch plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 93

 Molded Forms Workflow

In cases where the sketched boundaries are constrained with several dimensions, the results are
as follows:

In cases where there is a sketched plate boundary plate bounded by a profile, the software
resolves the long point - short point issues.

If there is a profile section size difference, the software maintains minimum dimensions where the
sketched boundary crosses the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 94

 Molded Forms Workflow

The following illustrations depict typical examples where minimum heights are maintained for
sketched or symbolic tripping brackets. In these examples, A equals the base object thickness.

Minimum distance is controlled by a combination of Sketch2D and the symbol

definition. You can identify dimensions that reflect minimum distances by adding graphic inputs in
the symbol file. When the software finds these inputs in the symbol, then the software makes the
necessary adjustments to ensure that the dimensions are maintained regardless of the supports
thickness direction. For more information, see 2D Symbols User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 95

SECTION 3

Placing Plate Systems

The Molded Forms task provides different groups of commands to create and represent single or
multiple surfaces for plate systems. Also, you can represent and store imported surfaces. These
commands start when you click the appropriate command icon on the vertical toolbar on the left
side of the screen.

When you create any plate system, the first step is to use the Properties option to confirm the
default attributes or define new values. Examples of attributes for a plate system include its name,
category, molded conventions, its parent plate system, material properties, material thickness,
tightness, and continuity.
The next step is defining the surface geometry of the plate system. You then define topological
boundaries of the plate system by selecting objects in the three-dimensional workspace,
selecting objects from the Workspace Explorer, or selecting objects from a list of potential
bounding objects. For more information, see Plate System Boundaries (on page 98).

 When a plate system is created, a plate part is also created. Plate parts are detailed in the
Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the Structural
Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see Plate
Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 125).
 Minimum height or distances are maintained by the software for objects that use Sketch 2D,
such as plate systems with sketched boundaries and mother curves, and standalone plate
parts with sketched boundaries. For more information, see Minimum Distance (on page 92).
 When you create or edit a plate system or a stand-alone plate part, the dialog box title
displays the plate system name using the format [Plate System: <name of the plate
system>], as shown below.

Copying Plate and Profile Systems

When you copy, move, or mirror systems (including through Model Data Reuse and Model Data
Transform operations in the Project Management task) without including a boundary in the copy
(by selecting Edit > Paste > Delete Optional), the software replaces the boundary with a
standalone boundary. This prevents the plate system from going to the To Do List. After the
copy, you can replace the standalone boundary with a new boundary by using Tools >
Automatic Reconnect.
If the original boundary was detailed, Delete Optional also deletes the physical connection
between the plate system and the boundary. For the copied plate system, if you replace the

Molded Forms User's Guide 96

 Placing Plate Systems

standalone boundary with a new detailed boundary, then the software creates a new physical
connection.
For more information, see:
 Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) (on page 1388)
 Move, Mirror Copy, and Paste Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide
 Model Data Reuse (MDR) in the Project Management User's Guide
 Model Data Transform (MDT) in the Project Management User's Guide

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 40).

Planar Plate System - Places a planar plate system. For more information, see Planar
Plate System (on page 99).

Imported Plate System - Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is used
to create a plate system, typically a complex, non-planar system such as a ship hull.
For more information, see Imported Plate System (on page 130).

Linear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve normal to
the sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded Plate System (on page
156).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve along a
linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. For more information, see Nonlinear
Extruded Plate System (on page 180).

Revolved Plate System - Places a plate system by rotating a curve around an axis.
For more information, see Revolved Plate System (on page 205).

Bracket Plate System - Creates a bracket plate system oriented by a plane or by its
supports. For more information, see Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Advanced Plate System - Creates specialized plate systems such as side plates, ring
plates, transition plates, continuity plates, and buckling plates. For more information,
see Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Child Plate System - Creates a plate system that is a child to and in the same plane
as another plate system. For more information, see Child Plate System (on page 426).

Ruled Plate System - Creates a plate system that is interpolated between two
non-planar curves. For more information, see Ruled Plate System (on page 449).

Molded Forms User's Guide 97

 Placing Plate Systems

Plate System Boundaries

You can select any of the following as boundaries for plate systems:
 Plate systems.
 Profile systems such as stiffeners, beams, or edge reinforcements. A plate can be bound to
the webs and flanges of profile systems.
 Standard members created in the Structure task. A plate can be bound to the webs and
flanges of members.
 Built-up members, but only when the web or flange plate systems of the built-up are selected.
 Sketched boundary curves.

Sketching Limitations
Sketched curves must extend beyond other bounding objects. In this example, the curve for a
linear extruded deck extends beyond the hull boundary:

In this example, the bracket boundary curve extends beyond the top and bottom flanges:

Bounding and Splitting

A profile or member cannot be used to both bound and split a plate at the same time. In the
following example, the two plates can be created in two different ways:

Molded Forms User's Guide 98

 Placing Plate Systems

1. The plates are created separately, each using both members and a sketched line as
boundaries.
2. A single plate is created using the horizontal member and two sketched lines as boundaries.
After creation, the plate can then be split by the vertical member.

Planar Plate System

The Planar Plate System command creates planar plate systems. These plate systems are
generally used to represent decks, sides of the deck house, transverse bulkheads, and
longitudinal bulkheads, but are not limited to just those uses.

Creating a plate system involves three steps. First, define the plane of the plate system. Finally,
define topological boundaries of the plate system. Then, use the Properties command to
define attributes and defaults for the plate system. You can define the topological boundaries by
selecting objects in a view, selecting objects from the Workspace Explorer, or selecting objects
from a list of potential bounding objects.

Using Planar Plate Systems with Members

If a planar plate system is inserted along the length of a standard or built-up member, such as on
the flange, the needed penetration logical connections, splits, and slot on the flange are not
created automatically. You must then use Manual Split to create connections and splits and
Execute Detailing to detail the plate and create the flange slot. The preferred method is to
use Advanced Plate System , which automatically creates all needed connections, splits,
and the flange slot. For more information, see Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Planar Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place the planar plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties

Opens the Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the selected structural specification. For more information,
see Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 106).

Molded Forms User's Guide 99

 Placing Plate Systems

Define Plane
Specifies the reference plane of the plate system. You can select multiple planes to place
multiple plate systems at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each
plane and places the plate systems. After placement, the plate systems are unrelated to each
other and can be edited as individual entities unless boundaries are defined as boundary
curves. If so, then a single curve is related to all of the plate systems. See the Define Plane
Controls section below.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary
curves. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define
Boundary Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,

then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 100

 Placing Plate Systems

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the Define Plane or Boundary Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 101

 Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 102

 Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Molded Forms User's Guide 103

 Placing Plate Systems

Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?

 Place a planar plate system (on page 104)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a planar plate system

1. Click Planar Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Define Plane .
3. Specify the plane for the plate system using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
4. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)

5. Click Define Boundaries .

6. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
7. Set the remaining plate system properties.
8. Click Finish.

Modify a plate system

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the plate system to modify.
The plate system ribbon appears.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the plate system as needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 104

 Placing Plate Systems

 You cannot change the defining surface definition for plate systems that were created for a
built-up member.
 You cannot delete individual plates from a built-up member.
 If you select a plate that is part of a built-up member, some of the boxes on the Properties
dialog box are read-only.
 If the plate system is constrained to geometric construction points, you can modify the points.
A separate ribbon displays for the points. For more information, see Points (Geometric
Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028).

Move a plate system to a different system in the model

hierarchy
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Locate Filter, select Molded Forms (Root Level).
3. Select one or more root plate systems to move.
The plate system ribbon appears.

 Select only the root plate system to move. The root plate system is not moved if any of its
children in the hierarchy are also selected.
 If you are selecting more than one root plate system, use CTRL+click to select only the
root systems.
4. In the Select Parent box, select a new system. If the needed system is not available, click
More to open the Select System dialog box.
If an invalid system, such as another root plate system, is selected, an
error message displays and the plate system is not moved.
5. Click Finish.
The root plate system and its children move to the new system in the Workspace Explorer.

 Children of a root plate system (such as leaf plate systems and parts, profile systems and
parts, openings, seams, and connections) always move with the root plate system.
 Children cannot be selected and moved out of the root plate system hierarchy.
 Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task, or with the New System
command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide, or New
System in the Common User's Guide.
 Root plate systems can also be moved in the Common task. The workflow and restrictions
are similar, except that the system moves after making a selection in the Select Parent box
because Finish is not available in the Common task.

Molded Forms User's Guide 105

 Placing Plate Systems

Delete a plate system

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the plate system to delete.
4. Click Delete .
You cannot delete individual plates from a built-up member.

Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107)
Material Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 109)
Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 110)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Molded Forms User's Guide 106

 Placing Plate Systems

Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the planar plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to

Molded Forms User's Guide 107

 Placing Plate Systems

Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 108

 Placing Plate Systems

Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.

Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 109

 Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the plate system.
All profile orientation properties can only be modified at the root system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Molded Forms User's Guide 110

 Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 111

 Placing Plate Systems

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 112

 Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 113

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 114

 Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 115

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 116

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 117

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 118

 Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 119

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 120

 Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 121

 Placing Plate Systems

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:

Molded Forms User's Guide 122

 Placing Plate Systems

 Are on the plate of a designed tube member

 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.

Molded Forms User's Guide 123

 Placing Plate Systems

Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:

 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object. To change the options on the list, edit the Weld Type select list
in Catalog.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Plant
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your
access level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by
the ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 124

 Placing Plate Systems

ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date when the object was last modified.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

General Tab
The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You can
edit the properties on these tabs.

Plate Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the plate part that you are editing.
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the plate part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object.
PlatePartRule - Creates a name based on the parent root plate system name, the location
within the parent root plate system, and the parent assembly name.
User Defined - Name the plate part yourself by using the appropriate box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 125

 Placing Plate Systems

Type
Displays the type of the plate part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Specification
Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Tightness
Specifies the water tightness of the object. It is inherited from the parent system.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 126

 Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the material properties for the plate part that you are editing. The material properties are
inherited from the parent system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Actual Thickness
Displays the material thickness for the object.

General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general properties of the plate part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.

Category: Standard
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125).
PlateTightness
Specifies the water tightness of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateTightness
codelist.
PlateType
Specifies the type of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateType codelist.
Thickening Technique Requested
Specifies the technique requested to thicken the plate part.
This property affects only the behavior of plate parts derived from systems. The property
defaults to Procedural at creation. Changing the value of this property can affect the
geometry of the part as described below.
Standalone plate parts initially display nothing for this property. You can change the value,
but those changes do not change the part or its geometry. Smart 3D thickens all standalone
plate parts, including collars, using procedural thickening.
Undefined (blank) indicates that Smart 3D selects the appropriate technique. Smart 3D
automatically changes this value to Procedural.
Procedural indicates the part is thickened using the standard thickening method provided by
the ACIS modeler. This works for the vast majority of parts, and you should not change this
value unless there is a specific reason to try a different technique.
If the thickening fails using ACIS, and the part is a hull part, the software
automatically tries the NonProcedural thickening technique. This option only controls which
method the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used

Molded Forms User's Guide 127

 Placing Plate Systems

from the Thickening Technique Used property.

Procedural with slit is used for parts that have internal slits or discontinuities in the surface
of the system that form part of the boundary of parts on the system. The currently-supported
example of this is a surface with a combination of split and bent knuckles joined end to end.
Because Smart 3D does not support splitting knuckles and changing the properties of
different segments, these surface must be constructed with the correct geometry to reflect
the bent and split portions. Parts that are bounded by the slit, and potentially parts on the
system that are within half a meter of the slit, must have this value set to assure a proper trim.
Setting this attribute on parts that do not need it should not cause a failure but may cause the
part to take more time to detail. The following pictures show an example of this type of
surface, first the full surface and then a close-up in the region of the slit or discontinuity.
The plate system in these pictures is split into three parts by the knuckle (shown as white)
and the two black seams. You must be sure that a single part does not touch both sides of
the slit.

NonProcedural is an infrequently used option. Historically, a much higher percentage of

parts failed to thicken with the ACIS modeler, and many designers used a specific hull form
definition tool that produced a surface with very specific characteristics. NonProcedural
thickening provided a tool that would thicken almost any part on this type of surface, even if
the ACIS modeler failed. The ACIS modeler has improved greatly, and the NonProcedural
thickening method has not been enhanced to handle the surfaces produced by many of the
hull form tools currently in use. Setting this option may solve a failure-to-thicken problem on a
hull part.
If NonProcedural thickening fails for a hull shell part, Smart 3D automatically tries
to thicken the part using Procedural thickening. This option only controls which method the
software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used from the
Thickening Technique Used property.
Thickening Technique Used
Displays the technique used to thicken the plate part. This is blank for a standalone plate part,
although Procedural is always used for these parts. It displays one of the values defined for
Thickening Technique Requested for a system-derived part. The meaning for these values
is the same as defined for Thickening Technique Requested.

Molded Forms User's Guide 128

 Placing Plate Systems

Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all available
values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically Vertical Drop,
Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Weight & CG Tab

Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the part.
Type
Displays the type of weight: Dry Weight or Wet Weight.
Weight
Displays the weight of the plate part pertaining to the weight type.
CoG X
Displays the position of center of gravity along the X-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Y
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Y-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Z
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Z-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use to measure the center of gravity.

Extended User Attributes Tab

Displays the user attributes that have been bulkloaded on the report data object related to the
part. Changes to these attributes do not cause the related manufacturing part to go out-of-date.
The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value
appears on the right side of the grid.

Routing Tab
Specifies routing properties for the part. By default, no routing properties are set.
Create
Sets routing properties for the part.
Delete
Deletes the routing properties for the part.

Molded Forms User's Guide 129

 Placing Plate Systems

Rule
Specifies a predefined rule set or a user-defined rule that is applicable to the part.
Workcenter
Select an assembly workcenter where the part is produced from a facility-defined rule set.
The list contains all available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter
hierarchy. Examples of workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines.
Workcenters may also be areas and zones where a block is assembled from multiple
assemblies.
Stage Code
Specifies the workcenter code.
No. Of Actions
Specifies the number of actions required to produce the part.
Action
Specifies the name of the action.
Machine
Specifies the type of machine used to perform the required operation.
Code
Specifies the machine code.

Imported Plate System

Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is typically created using third-party
applications such as Napa, Rhino, or TID. If the file represents a hull form, it can contain naval
architecture reference curves.

Reference Curves
The software displays these curves as part of the plate system surface. The curves are also
named, typed, and categorized, allowing you to query for a curve or select the curve and use it as
a reference just like any other curve. You can modify the properties of reference curves, such as
the name and type. You cannot modify the geometry of a naval architecture reference curve in
the software. You must import a new file that contains the modified curve geometry.
The software supports the following ship curves that can be included as naval architecture
references curves in the imported file:
 Buttock_line - A curve lying on the molded surface of a hull that is the intersection of a
longitudinal plane with a hull molded form.

Molded Forms User's Guide 130

 Placing Plate Systems

 Centerline - A curve lying on the molded surface of a hull that is the intersection of the
longitudinal center plane with the hull molded form.
 Flat_of_Bottom - The boundary curve of the bottom planar surface at the hull molded form
base.
 Flat_of_Side - The boundary curve of the side planar surface at the outer-most port or
starboard side of the hull molded form.
 Intersection_Line - A curve that is the intersection of two surfaces found on, or within, a
molded form.
 Station_Line - A curve lying on the hull molded surface that is the intersection of a
transverse plane with a hull molded form.
 Waterline - A curve lying on the hull molded surface that is the intersection of the water plane
with the hull molded form.
 Bounding_Line - Any bounding curve of a ship surface.
 Unspecified - A curve whose relation to naval architecture is not known or not recorded.
The software recognizes the following types of naval architecture reference curves:
 Knuckle Curves (KNU) - A 3D curve on the hull surface that exhibits tangent discontinuity
(knuckle constraint) of more than one degree anywhere along its curve geometry. Multiple
knuckle curves can occur and are given unique names. Knuckle reference curves support
rules that determine the production method (bend, split, or ignore) governing their treatment
and processing in the model.
 Tangent Curves (TAN) - A 3D curve on the hull surface that exhibits tangency constraint
when intersected by orthogonal curves (section, waterlines, and buttocks). Multiple tangent
curves can occur and are given unique names.
 Stem and Stern Profiles Curves (STM PROF and STR PROF) - The profile curves that
define the outline of the hull at the Y=0 position. It is usually split into two individual curves,
the Stem and Stern Profile. These two curves meet at amidships at Z=0. These curves are
unique to single hulls.
 Stem and Stern Half Siding Curves (HS STM and HS STR) - The stem and stern
half-siding curve is a 3D curve that defines the points at which waterline endings knuckle in to
the centerline of the hull (stem and stern profile). The resulting surface bounded by the
half-siding curve is a flat surface. These curves are unique to single hulls.
 Stem and Stern Tangent Curves (STM TAN, STR TAN) - The stem and stern tangent curve
is a 3D curve that defines the points at which waterline endings are tangential into a circular
or elliptical waterline ending. The resulting surface bounded by the tangent curve is a circular
or elliptical part cone. These curves are unique in single hulls.

Imported Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to import a .SAT or .IGS file into the model.

Imported Plate System Properties

Opens the Imported Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected
structural specification. For more information, see Imported Plate System Properties Dialog
Box (on page 137).

Molded Forms User's Guide 131

 Placing Plate Systems

File Definition
Select the file to import. This option opens the Open Hull File dialog box.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls

These options are only available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple

Molded Forms User's Guide 132

 Placing Plate Systems

bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Define Plane Controls

Only available when you use the Boundary Curve option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.

Molded Forms User's Guide 133

 Placing Plate Systems

Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 134

 Placing Plate Systems

Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Mirror Surface
Mirrors the surface about the longitudinal centerline. This option is only available when you
are importing a plate from an .IGS file. You can use this option for a complete hull surface
when the IGES file defines only half of the hull. A preview for the hull is updated automatically
when you select or clear the option. The default value is not to mirror and is reset to this state
after you click Finish.

Mirror Reference Curves

Mirrors the reference curves about the longitudinal centerline. This option is only available
when you are importing a plate from an .IGS file. You can use this option for complete
reference curves when the IGES file defines only half of the hull. The default value is not to

Molded Forms User's Guide 135

 Placing Plate Systems

mirror and is reset to this state after you click Finish.

What do you want to do?

 Import a plate system (on page 136)
 Swap hulls (on page 137)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Import a plate system

This workflow applies to all imported plates systems, including hulls.

1. On the Molded Forms vertical toolbar, click Imported Plate System .

2. Select the .SAT or .IGS file to import.
To show .IGS files in the file browser, you must select IGES files (*.igs) as the file
type.
3. Click Open.
4. If you are importing a hull from an .IGS file and the file defines only half of the hull, click
Mirror surface , Mirror reference curves , or both to import a complete hull.
By default, the two mirror options are disabled. A preview for the hull is updated
automatically when you click Mirror surface .
5. On the ribbon bar, select an appropriate plate type. For example, select Hull for a hull form.
6. Specify the properties for the imported plate system.
7. Define the boundaries for the imported plate system.
8. Click Finish.

 A complete hull form may not have boundaries.

 If you define an ambiguous boundary, you must provide more information by selecting
bounded areas that together compose the total bounded area.
 For a hull imported from IGES, an import log file and a .SAT file are automatically created in
the same folder as the source .IGS file. The surfaces and curves are automatically named
based on the data in the .IGS file directory, and all imported curves are set to Reference type.
You can modify the curve type of multiple curves by selecting the reference curves in the
Workspace Explorer and then clicking Reference Curve Properties .
 A minimum set of checks are performed on the data to ensure that it meets the criteria
necessary to successfully bound, trim, detail, and manufacture in the software. These checks
are the same as those available in the Geometry Analysis and Repair (GAR) task. If any of
the checks are not met, then the plate system is created, but it is added to the To Do List
with an appropriate error message. You must review the data in GAR, determine the cause of

Molded Forms User's Guide 136

 Placing Plate Systems

the problem, and make needed corrections. The third-party tool used to create the geometry
might be needed to make the corrections.

Swap hulls
Follow this procedure only if you are very early in the design cycle with a model having a minimal
number of objects detailed in the Structural Detailing task. Otherwise, follow the procedure
described in Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay (on page 1396).

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the existing hull in the model.

4. On the ribbon, select File Definition .

5. Select the .SAT or .IGS file that contains the new hull to import.
To show .IGS files in the file browser, you must select IGES files (*.igs) as the file
type.
6. Click Open.
7. If you are importing a hull from an .IGS file and the file defines only half of the hull, click
Mirror surface , Mirror reference curves , or both to import a complete hull.
By default, the two mirror options are disabled. A preview for the hull is updated
automatically when you click Mirror surface
8. Click Finish.

Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf imported plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 137

 Placing Plate Systems

 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 138)
Material Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 140)
Molded Conventions Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 141)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)
Delay Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 155)

Main Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the imported plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 138

 Placing Plate Systems

StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system

name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority

Molded Forms User's Guide 139

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.

Molded Forms User's Guide 140

 Placing Plate Systems

Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Imported Plate System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the plate system that you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 141

 Placing Plate Systems

Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.

Molded Forms User's Guide 142

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 143

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 144

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 145

 Placing Plate Systems

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 146

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset

Molded Forms User's Guide 147

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 148

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 149

 Placing Plate Systems

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction

Molded Forms User's Guide 150

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 151

 Placing Plate Systems

In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 152

 Placing Plate Systems

plate system to place the profiles.

With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for

Molded Forms User's Guide 153

 Placing Plate Systems

designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 154

 Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Delay Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies properties for delaying recalculation of the imported plate system that you are editing.

Delay Settings
Molded Forms Delay - Delays recalculation of Molded Forms objects. The objects are instead
added to the To Do List.
Plate Split Delay - Delays splitting of the plate system by seams.

Range Settings
User range of change - Restricts recalculation to one or more range boxes that you specify.
Type low and high values for X, Y, and Z in User Range to create a box.
System range of change - Restricts recalculation to a range box created by the software and
based on the X, Y, and Z differences between the old and new imported plate systems.

User Range
Low - Specifies the lowest value along a coordinate system axis. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
High - Specifies the highest value along a coordinate system axis. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
Modify - For a selected existing row in the Display Range grid, changes the Low and High
values to the new values.
Add - Adds a new row of Low and High values to the Display Range grid.
Display Range - Displays range boxes where recalculation is delayed. Each row in the grid
contains low and high coordinate values for a range box.
- Selects a row in the Display Range grid. When a row is selected, the range box displays in
a graphic view.
Clear All - Clears row selection in Display Range.
Select All - Selects all rows in Display Range.
Delete - Removes the selected row from Display Range.
Delete All - Removes all rows from Display Range.
OK - Accepts the values and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Rejects the values and closes the dialog box.
Apply - Accepts the values but does not close the dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 155

 Placing Plate Systems

Linear Extruded Plate System

The Linear Extruded Plate System command extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve
normal to the sketching plane. You define the 2D curve that the software uses to define the plate
system surface geometry.

Use the Nonlinear Extruded Plate System command if you need the 2D curve to
follow a curved path instead of always being normal to the sketching plane. For more information,
see Nonlinear Extruded Plate System (on page 180).

Plate Knuckles
If the plate system has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve, the software creates a
plate knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the Workspace Explorer. For
more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Linear Extruded Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to extrude a plate system along a linear extrusion curve in the
model.

Plate System Properties

Opens the Linear Extruded Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view
and modify the properties of the plate system. The initial plate system properties default from
the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected structural specification. For more
information, see Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 162).

Mother Curve Definition

Defines the sketching plane and the shape of the mother curve. See the Define Mother
Curve Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

Define Boundaries
Specifies the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 156

 Placing Plate Systems

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,

then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Mother Curve Controls

Available when you use the Mother Curve Definition option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a

Molded Forms User's Guide 157

 Placing Plate Systems

message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D

Molded Forms User's Guide 158

 Placing Plate Systems

Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the Mother Curve Definition or Boundary Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Molded Forms User's Guide 159

 Placing Plate Systems

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 160

 Placing Plate Systems

Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.

If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?

 Place a linear extruded plate system (on page 161)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a linear extruded plate system

1. Click Linear Extruded Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the sketching plane for the mother curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

Molded Forms User's Guide 161

 Placing Plate Systems

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the mother curve for the extruded plate system.
9. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

10. Click Define Boundaries .

11. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
12. Click Accept .
13. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
14. Set the remaining plate system properties.
15. Click Finish.

Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 162

 Placing Plate Systems

 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163)
Material Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Molded Conventions Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the linear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as

Molded Forms User's Guide 163

 Placing Plate Systems

Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 164

 Placing Plate Systems

Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 165

 Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the material properties for the linear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System

Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the linear extruded plate system that
you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the

Molded Forms User's Guide 166

 Placing Plate Systems

longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 167

 Placing Plate Systems

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 168

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Molded Forms User's Guide 169

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 170

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 171

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 172

 Placing Plate Systems

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 173

 Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 174

 Placing Plate Systems

opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 175

 Placing Plate Systems

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 176

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface

Molded Forms User's Guide 177

 Placing Plate Systems

normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 178

 Placing Plate Systems

opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 179

 Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System

The Nonlinear Extruded Plate System command extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve
along a linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. The software uses the 2D curves to define the
plate system surface geometry.

Use the Linear Extruded Plate System command instead of this command if the
2D curve remains normal to the sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded
Plate System (on page 156).

Plate Knuckles
If the plate system has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve, the software creates a
plate knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the Workspace Explorer. For
more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to extrude a plate system along a non- linear extrusion curve in
the model.

Plate System Properties

Opens the Nonlinear Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
plate system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the
selected structural specification. For more information, see Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box (on page 187).

Extrusion Definition
Specify the path the mother curve is to follow. See the Define Curve Controls and Define
Plane Controls sections below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 180

 Placing Plate Systems

Mother Curve Definition

Defines the sketching plane and the shape of the mother curve. See the Define Curve
Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

` Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Curve Controls

Available when you use the Extrusion Definition and Mother Curve Definition options.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Molded Forms User's Guide 181

 Placing Plate Systems

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Molded Forms User's Guide 182

 Placing Plate Systems

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the Extrusion Definition, Mother Curve Definition or Boundary
Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable

Molded Forms User's Guide 183

 Placing Plate Systems

options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 184

 Placing Plate Systems

The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?

 Place a nonlinear extruded plate system (on page 185)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a nonlinear extruded plate system

1. Click Nonlinear Extruded Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the grid plane for the extruded curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

Molded Forms User's Guide 185

 Placing Plate Systems

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the extruded curve.
Be sure to read Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).
9. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

10. Click Mother Curve Definition .

11. Specify the sketching plane for the mother curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

12. Click Add Intersecting Item .

13. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.
14. Click Add Projection Item .
15. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.
16. Click Sketch 2D .
17. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the mother curve for the extruded plate system.
18. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

19. Click Define Boundaries .

20. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
21. Click Accept .
22. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
23. Set the remaining plate system properties.
24. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 186

 Placing Plate Systems

Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 187)
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 190)
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 191)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the nonlinear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type

Molded Forms User's Guide 187

 Placing Plate Systems

(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the

Molded Forms User's Guide 188

 Placing Plate Systems

property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on

Molded Forms User's Guide 189

 Placing Plate Systems

page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 190

 Placing Plate Systems

Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the nonlinear extruded plate system
that you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 191

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 192

 Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 193

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 194

 Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 195

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 196

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 197

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 198

 Placing Plate Systems

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 199

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 200

 Placing Plate Systems

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 201

 Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 202

 Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 203

 Placing Plate Systems

member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 204

 Placing Plate Systems

Revolved Plate System

The Revolved Plate System command creates a plate system by rotating a curve around an
axis. You define the 2D curve that the software uses to define the plate system surface geometry
and the axis of revolution.

Revolved Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place a rotated plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties

Opens the Revolved Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
plate system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the
selected structural specification. For more information, see Revolved Plate System
Properties Dialog Box (on page 210).

First Curve Definition

Defines the shape of the mother curve and the axis of rotation. See the Define Curve
Controls, Sketch 2D Command, and Define Plane Controls sections below.
Second Curve Definition
Defines the extent of the revolution for the mother curve about the axis of rotation. See the
Define Revolution Controls section below.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Plane Controls sections below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Curve Controls

Available when you use the First Curve Definition option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Molded Forms User's Guide 205

 Placing Plate Systems

Add Projection Item

Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Sketch 2D Command
Axis of Rotation
Select a line element to designate as the axis of rotation. The line is green when selected.
This Axis of Rotation command is available only with the First Curve Definition option. It
displays on the Draw toolbar of the Sketch 2D environment.

Define Revolution Controls

Available when you use the Second Curve Definition option.

360° Revolution
Select to have the mother curve rotate 360 degrees around the axis of rotation.

Revolution Angle
Select to limit the mother curve rotation about the axis of rotation.
Angle
Type the angle for the mother curve to rotate about the axis of rotation. You must define the
direction by clicking the mouse button when the cursor is on the side in which to rotate. This
option is only available when the Revolution Angle option is selected.
Both Directions
Select to have the mother curve rotate both directions about the axis of rotation from the
sketching plane used to define the mother curve. The mother curve is rotated by the Angle
value in each direction.

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the First Curve Definition or Define Boundaries options.

Molded Forms User's Guide 206

 Placing Plate Systems

Offset from Plane

Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available

Molded Forms User's Guide 207

 Placing Plate Systems

when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 208

 Placing Plate Systems

Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?

 Place a revolved plate system (on page 209)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a revolved plate system

1. Click Revolved Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the sketching plane for the curve and rotation axis using one of the following
methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the curve for the revolved plate system. This is the
curve that is to revolve around the axis.
9. Draw a straight line to represent the axis of rotation for the revolved plate system.

10. Select Axis of Rotation (located under the Select command in the Sketch 2D
environment), and then select the straight line that you drew for the axis of rotation. The
software changes the line color to green to indicate that it accepts the selected line as the
axis of rotation.
11. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.
12. Click Accept .
13. Specify the revolution angle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 209

 Placing Plate Systems

14. Click Accept .

15. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
16. Click Accept .
17. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
18. Set the remaining plate system properties.
19. Click Finish.

Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 211)
Material Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 213)
Molded Conventions Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 214)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Molded Forms User's Guide 210

 Placing Plate Systems

Main Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the revolved plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to

Molded Forms User's Guide 211

 Placing Plate Systems

Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 212

 Placing Plate Systems

Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.

Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the revolved plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 213

 Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the revolved plate system that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Molded Forms User's Guide 214

 Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 215

 Placing Plate Systems

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 216

 Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 217

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 218

 Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 219

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 220

 Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 221

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 222

 Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 223

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 224

 Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 225

 Placing Plate Systems

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:

Molded Forms User's Guide 226

 Placing Plate Systems

 Are on the plate of a designed tube member

 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Bracket Plate System

Creates plate systems for primary structural brackets that can be stiffened, penetrated by
stiffeners on the bounding structure, and split with design seams.

Molded Forms User's Guide 227

 Placing Plate Systems

A bracket plate system is always bounded to the structure that it supports. You select a plane to
locate and orient the bracket. The bracket has predefined shapes defined by symbols and rules.
A bracket is classified by its plane definition and its number of supports. Brackets are oriented by
a selected plane or by the supports.

Bracket by Plane Bracket by Supports

Bracket plane Reference plane. The plane of one of the supports

orientation defined (profile web or plate).
by:

Types of supports Plate system, profile system web, Plate system and profile system.
profile system flange, member
system web, and member system
flange.

Plane controls used By Plane or Offset Plane Bracket Plane by Selected Supports
Plane by Point and Vector

Plane by Three Points

Use the command Supports cannot be used to orient Supports can be used to orient the
when: the bracket. bracket.
For more information, see Bracket For more information, see Bracket
by Plane (on page 246). by Supports (on page 247).

Bracket Plate System Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place bracket plate systems.

Properties
Opens the Bracket System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the bracket system that you are about to place in the model. The initial bracket
properties default from the selected structural specification and the bracket rules. For more
information, see Bracket System Properties Dialog Box (on page 250).

Bracket Browser
Opens the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box that specifies bracket
symbols, parameters, and properties in an icon-based browser. You can select a symbol for
the bracket prior to choosing the supports. For more information, see Define Bracket Plate
System Properties Dialog Box (on page 272).
Bracket
Displays the bracket symbol. You can also manually select a bracket symbol in the catalog
when Select from the Catalog is active.

Select from the Catalog

Allows the selection of any bracket symbol in the catalog in the Bracket box. This option is a
toggle with Create by Rule .

Molded Forms User's Guide 228

 Placing Plate Systems

Create by Rule
Limits the Bracket box to applicable rule-based symbols. This is the default option. This
option is a toggle with Select from the Catalog .
Rule Based - When Create by Rule is active, this option allows the software to define the
default rule-based bracket symbol. Clear this option to manually select another bracket
symbol that is in the applicable set defined in the rules. This option is the same as the Rule
Based option for the symbol question on the Selection tab of the Bracket System
Properties dialog box. The symbol question is always the final question. For more
information, see Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267).

 When using Create by Rule , Bracket and Rule Based are inactive. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports , select supports, and click Accept to
allow the bracket rules to determine the applicable options.
Select Plane
Click to select the type of plane upon which you want to place the bracket system. See
Plane Controls below.
Select Bracket Supports
Define the structural support systems for the bracket system. Brackets require at least two,
but not more than five, supports. Supports can be plate systems or profile stiffener systems.
See Bracket Support Controls below.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the bracket plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary
curves. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See Boundary
Controls and Plane Controls below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 229

 Placing Plate Systems

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,

then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Select Bracket Reinforcement

Adds reinforcement to the bracket. See Bracket Reinforcement Controls below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes and supports, runs the bracket rules, and determines the catalog
symbols that appear in the Bracket box.

Auto Finish Mode

Click to set this option to On and automatically place a bracket in the model as you define all
of the required parameters. When this option is set to Off, you must click Finish to place the
bracket. When this option is set to On, some parameters for two-support bracket or
three-support bracket are retained for creation of the next bracket.
 For a two-support bracket, if you select a plate as the first support, then that plate is
retained as Support 1. You only need to select a second support for subsequent
brackets. When creating a sketched two-support bracket, if Support 1 and Support 2
are profiles, then the sketched contour is retained for subsequent brackets. You can
select new supports without editing the contour in Sketch 2D.
 For a three-support bracket, if you select a plate as the first support and the third
support penetrates Support 1, then only Support 1 is retained for the next bracket. If
Support 3 does not penetrate Support 1, then Support 1 and Support 3 are retained.
You only need to select Support 2 for subsequent brackets.
To prevent the software from retaining the supports for subsequent brackets, click
Auto Finish Mode again to set it to Off without exiting the Bracket Plate System command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 230

 Placing Plate Systems

Connection

Select the type of connection between the bracket and supports: By Rule,
Trimmed, Lapped, or By Reference. The selected connection is used to guide
bracket selection in the rules. This option is not available if a bracket symbol is manually
selected in Bracket Symbol.
Override UV
Select to override the U and V offsets for all three points that are used to define the plane of a
tripping bracket and set the offsets to zero. For more information, see Tripping Bracket
Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1447).
Constraint
Select the orientation of a tripping bracket (or bracket by support) with its support. Select
Parallel, Perpendicular, Transverse, Vertical, Longitudinal, Fixed X, Fixed Y, or Fixed Z.
This option is only available when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select
Plane.
Orientation

Select the orientation of the bracket: right side, left side, or both sides. This
option is only available for a one-support bracket on a profile.

Toggle Dir
Click to move bracket placement to another location using the same combination of supports.
Each click toggles the location to the next acceptable location.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Plane Controls
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Molded Forms User's Guide 231

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.
/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Molded Forms User's Guide 232

 Placing Plate Systems

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Plane by Selected Supports

Places the bracket plate system on a plane defined by its supports, such as a plate support
along one edge, and a profile or plate support along the other edges. See Bracket Support
Controls below. A tripping bracket is commonly placed by this method and is supported on
the flange side of one or more profiles. For more information, see Bracket by Supports (on
page 247). This is the default plane option for Select Shape from Standard Catalog
Browser .

Bracket Support Controls

Support 1
Select the first support for the bracket system.

Support 2
Select the second support for the bracket system.

Support 3
Select the third support for the bracket system (For 3S, 4S, and 5S brackets).

Support 4
Select the fourth support for the bracket system (For 4S and 5S brackets).

Support 5
Select the fifth support for the bracket system (For 5S brackets).
Length 1
Type a value to define a point along Support 1 on the bracket plane.
 If the support is linear, then the Length 1 box does not display.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 1 value can be adjusted to change the
bracket plane position relative to the support.
Length 2
Type a value to define a second point along Support 2 on the bracket plane.
 If the support is linear, then the Length 2 box does not display.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 2 value can be adjusted to change the
bracket plane position relative to the support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 233

 Placing Plate Systems

 Length 1 and Length 2 values affect the position of the bracket plane. These values do not
affect bracket creation.
 The software cannot create the bracket If a bracket dimension is greater than a support
dimension.

Boundary Controls
Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D

Molded Forms User's Guide 234

 Placing Plate Systems

Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Bracket Reinforcement Controls

By Rule
Select to limit reinforcement selection to the default defined in the rules.
Reinforcement

If By Rule is cleared, select the reinforcement type: None, Buckling Stiffener,

Edge Reinforcement, or Flange.

The following options are only available when you select Edge Reinforcement or Buckling
Stiffener for Reinforcement and after you make a reinforcement selection and click Accept
:

Bracket Reinforcement Properties

Click to open the Bracket Reinforcement Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the bracket stiffener or edge reinforcement. The initial bracket
properties default from the selected structural specification and the bracket and
reinforcement rules. For more information, see Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box
(on page 271).
When Flange is selected, properties are displayed on the Flange Selection
tab of the Bracket System Properties dialog box. For more information, see Flange
Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 269).
Override
Select to override the rule-based values for Section Size, Material, and Grade and manually
select different values. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Section Size
Displays the rule-based profile cross-section of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override
to modify this value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Material
Displays the rule-based material type of the bracket reinforcement. Override to modify this
value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement or
Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Grade
Displays the rule-based material grade of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override to
modify this value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge

Molded Forms User's Guide 235

 Placing Plate Systems

Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.

Primary Orientation
The primary direction of reinforcement placement, based on the molded conventions of the
bracket. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 254). This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.

General Controls
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Bracket Best Practices (on page 50)

What do you want to do?

 Create a one support bracket by plane (on page 237)
 Create a two support bracket by plane (on page 238)
 Create a three support bracket by plane (on page 239)
 Create a four or five support bracket by plane (on page 239)

Molded Forms User's Guide 236

 Placing Plate Systems

 Create a two support bracket by supports (on page 241)

 Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports (on page 241)
 Manually select a bracket symbol (on page 242)
 Sketch a bracket (on page 243)
 Add reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244)
 Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon browser (on page 244)
 Modify a bracket (on page 245)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a bracket (on page 245)

Create a one support bracket by plane

This workflow creates one or two brackets on the web and flange of a profile system.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket support.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .

4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the profile system that you want to use.

5. If the profile has a flange on more than one side, select an option for Orientation to select
the side for a single bracket, or to place a bracket on each side.
6. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
7. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
8. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
9. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

Molded Forms User's Guide 237

 Placing Plate Systems

10. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
11. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
12. Click Finish.

Create a two support bracket by plane

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .

4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system support.

5. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.
6. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

7. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.

8. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
9. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
10. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

11. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
12. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
13. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 238

 Placing Plate Systems

Create a three support bracket by plane

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .

4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system support.

5. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.

6. Click Support 3 and select the third plate, profile, or member system support.
7. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

8. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.

9. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
10. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
11. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

12. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
13. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
14. Click Finish.

Create a four or five support bracket by plane

1. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:

Molded Forms User's Guide 239

 Placing Plate Systems

Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)

Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
2. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .

3. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system that you want to use.

For a four support bracket: For a five support bracket:

4. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.

5. Click Support 3 and select the third plate, profile, or member system support.

6. Click Support 4 and select the fourth plate, profile, or member system support.

7. For a five support bracket only, click Support 5 and select the fifth plate, profile, or
member system support.
8. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
9. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
10. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
11. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

12. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
13. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 240

 Placing Plate Systems

Create a two support bracket by supports

This workflow creates a bracket oriented by its supports. One or more of the supports may be
profile systems.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the ribbon, click Plane by Selected Supports as the plane option.

3. Select the first plate or profile system support.

4. Select the second plate or profile system support.

5. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

6. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.

7. If needed, select a new orientation value for Constraint.
8. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
9. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
10. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

11. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
12. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
13. Click Finish.

Select Auto Finish Mode to place brackets without clicking Finish and to retain the
first support when placing consecutive brackets.

Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports

This workflow creates a bracket oriented by its supports. One or more of the supports may be
profile systems.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the ribbon, click Plane by Selected Supports as the plane option.

3. Select the first plate or profile system support.
4. Select the third, fourth, and fifth plate or profile system supports as needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 241

 Placing Plate Systems

For a three support For a four support bracket: For a five support bracket:
bracket:

5. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
6. If needed, select a new orientation value for Constraint.
7. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
8. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
9. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

10. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
11. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
12. Click Finish.

For three-support brackets, select Auto Finish Mode to place brackets without
clicking Finish and to retain the first and third supports when placing consecutive brackets.

Manually select a bracket symbol

To override the rules and manually select a bracket when using Plane by Selected Supports
, perform the following steps:
1. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.
2. Select More in the Bracket box.
The Catalog Objects dialog box appears.
3. Select a bracket symbol, and click OK
4. Click Select Bracket Supports and continue with bracket creation.
5. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
6. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 242

 Placing Plate Systems

Sketch a bracket
If you want to sketch the free edges of a bracket, perform the following steps:

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click , and select the needed plane or support
method.
3. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.
4. Select More in the Bracket box.
The Catalog Objects dialog box appears.
5. Select a bracket symbol that supports sketching, and click OK.
Delivered symbols that support sketching have Sketched in their names.
6. Click Select Bracket Supports , and select the needed bracket supports.

7. Click Define Boundaries .

8. Click Boundary Curve .

9. Click Add Intersecting Item .

10. Select the bracket supports and other objects in the model that intersect the bracket
sketching plane. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment as reference
geometry.
11. Click Add Projection Item .
12. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use
when sketching the bracket. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
appear in the Sketch 2D environment as reference geometry.

13. Click Sketch 2D .

14. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the bracket.
You can constrain the bracket to geometric construction points referenced from profile
cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point at Offset
from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the Sketch 2D environment.
1. Click Finish in Sketch 2D.
2. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

3. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or

parameters for the bracket.
4. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 243

 Placing Plate Systems

Add reinforcement to a bracket

1. Do one of the following:
 In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select an existing bracket system.
 When creating a new bracket, click Select Bracket Supports , and select the
supports.
The Bracket Plate System ribbon appears.
2. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.

3. Click Select Bracket Reinforcement .

4. Select a value for Reinforcement to select a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or
flange.
5. Click Accept .
Flange parameters appear in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in the graphic
view.
6. Change the flange parameters as needed.
7. Click Finish.
To automatically place the default reinforcement defined in the catalog rules, select
Rule Based when Filter by Rules is visible.

Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon

browser
This workflow selects a bracket and bracket reinforcement in a single dialog box before selecting
the supports. The dialog box can remain open to simplify creation of successive brackets.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click , and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

Plane by Selected Supports - Select this option to create a tripping bracket.

The plane must intersect the bracket support.

3. Click Bracket Browser .

The Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box appears.
4. To manually select a bracket, clear By Rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 244

 Placing Plate Systems

5. To manually select a bracket reinforcement, clear Reinforcement By Rule.

6. Select a bracket and reinforcement type.
7. Set bracket properties and parameters.
8. Click Apply.
9. With the dialog box open, click Select Bracket Supports on the ribbon.
10. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the profile system that you want to use.
11. Select supports, connection type, and other parameters on the ribbon.
12. Click Finish.
The bracket is created.

Create additional brackets using the icon browser

1. To create another bracket of the same plane type, click the Define Bracket Plate System
Properties dialog box to make it the active window and repeat the previous steps.
2. To create a bracket of a different plane type, click Select Plane on the ribbon, and then
select a different option. Click the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box to
make it the active window, and repeat the previous steps.
3. Click Close to close the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box.

Modify a bracket
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.
3. Select one or more brackets to modify in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the brackets as needed.

 If you select multiple brackets, you can edit common properties on the ribbon.
 If you select multiple brackets by supports, you can modify load points and offsets for the
brackets. For more information, see Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 271).
 If the bracket is constrained to geometric construction points, you can modify the points. A
separate ribbon displays for the points. For more information, see Points (Geometric
Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028).

Delete a bracket
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Bracket Plate Systems in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the bracket system to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Molded Forms User's Guide 245

 Placing Plate Systems

Bracket by Plane
A bracket system can have a plane that intersects the supports. This type of bracket is created
when Coincident Plane , Offset from a Plane , Angle from plane , Plane by Point
and Vector , Plane by Three Points , or Plane by Vectors Normal are selected for
Select Plane.
The following examples show the general support selection sequence:

1 Support (1S) Bracket

Typically a profile with the bracket on the flange and web.

2 Support (2S) Bracket

Examples of supports include:

 Two plate systems
 A plate system and an edge reinforcement
 A rib connection, using a plate system and the web of a profile

3 Support (3S) Bracket

4 Support (4S) Bracket

Molded Forms User's Guide 246

 Placing Plate Systems

5 Support (5S) Bracket

Bracket by Supports
A bracket system can have a plane that is in line with one of its selected supports. This type of
bracket is created when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select Plane. You can
select a bracket symbol or sketch the free edge of the bracket.
The supports are used to define the plane of the bracket as well as its boundaries. The first two
supports must intersect in a manner that allows the plane to be defined. Bracket orientation is
driven by the orientation of one of the supports, such as a plate system or the web of a profile
system.
The default bracket orientation is parallel to the first selected support having a plane
usable to drive the orientation.

A flange can be added to the free edge of the bracket.

Molded Forms User's Guide 247

 Placing Plate Systems

A bracket can be supported on the flange side of one or more profiles. It is created in the same
way as other brackets except that the plane of the bracket is usually offset so that it can be fillet
welded to the supporting profile flange.

A bracket by supports can be lapped to one or more supports.

A bracket by supports can use two intersecting profiles on the same plate as supports. The
bracket can be supported by the web, or both the web and profile of the second profile.

A bracket is classified by its number of supports. The support object type selected affects the
available support object types available for succeeding supports. The following examples show
the general support selection sequence and the available combinations of supports:

Molded Forms User's Guide 248

 Placing Plate Systems

2 Support (2S) Bracket 4 Support (4S) Bracket

3 Support (3S) Bracket 5 Support (5S) Bracket

Support 1 Object Allowed Support 2 & 3 Objects Allowed Support 4 & 5 Objects

Plate edge Plate face Plate face

Plate edge Profile system
Profile system

Plate face Plate edge Plate face

Profile system Profile system

Profile system Plate face Plate face

Plate edge Profile system
Profile system

Support Order when Supports are Unconnected

Bracket supports are usually connected to each other, either by bounding or intersecting. There
are some circumstances where supports are not connected. The supports must be linear (for
profiles) and planar (for plates) so that the intersection of the unbounded landing curves and/or
unbounded definition planes are unique.

Molded Forms User's Guide 249

 Placing Plate Systems

Bracket System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf bracket system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 250)
Material Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 253)
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 254)
Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267)
Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 268)
Flange Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 269)
Flange Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 270)
Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 271)

Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the bracket plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 250

 Placing Plate Systems

 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate

type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 251

 Placing Plate Systems

Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on

Molded Forms User's Guide 252

 Placing Plate Systems

page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.
Edge Length Thickness Ratio (L/T) - Displays the length divided by the thickness. This value is
used by the rules to calculate the reinforcement.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the bracket that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 253

 Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the bracket system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 254

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 255

 Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 256

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 257

 Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 258

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 259

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 260

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 261

 Placing Plate Systems

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 262

 Placing Plate Systems

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 263

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Primary Orientation

Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 264

 Placing Plate Systems

Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Molded Forms User's Guide 265

 Placing Plate Systems

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 266

 Placing Plate Systems

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for bracket plate system selection.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when you
select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or

Molded Forms User's Guide 267

 Placing Plate Systems

answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-based
and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and the Rule
Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket class.
Bracket Contour Type - Select a bracket type. Select the check box to use the default answer of
the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket catalog item. Displays only the valid selections based on the
Bracket Contour Type answer.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the parameters for the bracket plate system.
Parameter - Displays the name of the parameter.
Value - Displays the value of the parameter. Values that are shaded cannot be modified.
Rule-Based - Displays a check box if the parameter value is rule-based. Clear the check box to
modify the value in the Value box.
Catalog Value - Displays the original catalog value if the Value box has been modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 268

 Placing Plate Systems

Flange Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for bracket flange selection. This tab is only visible after bracket
creation when Flange is selected for Reinforcement.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when you
select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or
answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-based
and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and the Rule
Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

User Answers
Select from a list of bracket flanges. The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket flange class.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 269

 Placing Plate Systems

Flange Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the default values for the bracket flange parameters. Values can be modified as
permitted by the catalog. This tab is only visible after bracket creation when Flange is
selected for Reinforcement.
Neutral Axis Ratio - Sets the molded side of the bracket and bracket flange. This option creates
the flange symbol at the correct location by accounting for molded convention thickness direction
and offset values.
 If the molded side is the inner surface, the value is 0.
 If the molded side is the outer surface, the value is 1.
 If the molded side is centered, the value is 0.5.
Flange Width - Width of the flange measured from the edge of the bracket symbol, which is also
the first bend tangent.
Inner Radius - Bend radius measured along the inner surface of the bend.
Bend Angle - Angle between the flange surface and bracket surface.

1 Flange Width

2 Bend Angle

3 Inner Radius

KnuLine - The knuckle line for the flange, measured from the edge where the flange is added to
the bracket plate to the edge of the unrolled flange. This is calculated by the rule based on the
other parameter values so that when the flange is fully bent at manufacturing, the flange length is
correct as specified. This parameter is read-only.
RollLine1 / RollLine2 - The roll lines define exactly how the flange is rolled or bent during
manufacturing. RollLine1 is measured from the edge where the flange is added to the bracket
plate, and RollLine2 is measured from where RollLine1 ends. These parameters are read-only
and are calculated by the rule based on the other parameter values.
Flange Orientation -Select the orientation of the flange bracket.
 Same As Parent - Orientation is the same as the bracket plate system primary profile
orientation.
 Against Parent - Orientation is in the opposite direction of the bracket plate system primary
profile orientation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 270

 Placing Plate Systems

Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default offset values and lapped status for a bracket by supports. This tab is only
visible after bracket creation when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select
Plane.

Offset Values
Load Point - Specifies the support load point of each point used to calculate the bracket system
plane. Offsets are measured from the load points. Load points are defined in the profile
cross-section symbols. If one of the supports is a plate system, then the load point value is 0. For
more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).

U Offset - Specifies the offset along the local U axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
V Offset - Specifies the offset along the local V axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
Override - Select to specify different values for Load Point, U Offset and V Offset.

Lapped Status
Displays the status of each bracket support. Lapped is selected if the support is lapped. This
value is set during bracket creation and cannot be changed here.

Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the bracket system reinforcement that you are editing. Tabs on this
dialog box are visible only after bracket creation.
Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)

Molded Forms User's Guide 271

 Placing Plate Systems

Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the cross-section settings for a bucking stiffener bracket reinforcement. This tab is only
visible after bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is
selected for Reinforcement.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type. The software displays the section type properties for
the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Override Cross Section Information
Select to override the cross-section information generated by the rule.
WebLength(WL)
Displays the web length of the reinforcement.
WebThickness(WT)
Displays the web thickness of the reinforcement.

Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the orientation settings for a bracket edge reinforcement. This tab is only visible after
bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement is selected for Reinforcement.
Rule
Select the orientation rule that you want to use for the edge reinforcement. Available rules
include Normal, Longitudinal, Vertical, and Transverse.

Define Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the bracket symbol to use prior to choosing supports. To select the bracket symbol and
edit its properties, click Define Bracket Plate System properties dialog box.
By Rule - Select to limit bracket selection to the default defined in the catalog rules. When
cleared, you can manually select a bracket.
The following options are available when you clear By Rule.
 Filters - Specifies the bracket type. Select All, 1S, 2S, 3S, 4S, 5S, Sketched, or Flanged.

Molded Forms User's Guide 272

 Placing Plate Systems

 Bracket class tabs - Each tab displays a bracket class name. The tabs are based on the
selected bracket type in Filter.
 Bracket icons - Each tab displays small icons of individual brackets within the bracket class.
Select an icon to display a preview of the bracket.
 Clear Recent - Clears the recently selected brackets from Recent tab.

Toggle Dir - Click to move bracket placement to another location using the same
combination of supports. Each click toggles the location to the next acceptable location.
Reinforcement By Rule - Select to limit bracket reinforcement selection to the default defined in
the catalog rules. If By Rule is unchecked, select the reinforcement type: None , Buckling
Stiffener , Edge Reinforcement , or Flange .

Bracket Properties
Bracket tab
Specifies properties for the bracket.
Thickness - Select the material thickness for the plate system.
Grade - Select the material grade for the plate system.
Type - Select the type of plate system that you are placing. If you do not specify a type, the
software automatically determines the type based on the plate system orientation. Plate systems
that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to Deck. Plate systems that are mostly
transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly
longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to Longitudinal Bulkhead. This option is also used by the
naming rule to name the plate system.
Thickness Direction - Select the direction in which to apply the thickness. If you have selected
supports for the bracket, the software displays an arrow indicating the active direction.
Buckling Stiffener and Edge Reinforcement tabs
Specifies properties for the bracket reinforcement. These tabs are available when Buckling
Stiffener or Edge Reinforcement are selected for Reinforcement By Rule.
Override - Select to override the rule-based values for Section Size, Material, and Grade and
manually select different values.
Section Type - Select the profile section type. The software displays the section type properties
for the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size - Displays the rule-based profile cross-section of the bracket reinforcement. Select
Override to modify this value.
Material - Displays the rule-based material type of the bracket reinforcement. Override to modify
this value.
Grade - Displays the rule-based material grade of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override to
modify this value.
Primary Orientation - Specifies the primary direction of reinforcement placement, based on the
molded conventions of the bracket. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket
System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 254).
Orientation Rule - Select the orientation rule that you want to use for the edge reinforcement.
Available rules include Normal, Longitudinal, Vertical, and Transverse.

Molded Forms User's Guide 273

 Placing Plate Systems

Flange tab

Specifies properties for the bracket flange. This tab is available only when Flange is
selected for Reinforcement By Rule.
Flange Shape - Select the flange type.
Flange Orientation -Select the orientation of the flange bracket.
 Same As Parent - Orientation is the same as the bracket plate system primary profile
orientation.
 Against Parent - Orientation is in the opposite direction of the bracket plate system primary
profile orientation.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket class.
Bracket Contour Type - Select a bracket type. Select the check box to use the default answer of
the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket catalog item. Displays only the valid selections based on the
Bracket Contour Type answer.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Connect Points Frame

Specifies the default offset values for a bracket by supports. This frame is available when Plane
by Selected Supports is selected for Select Plane on the ribbon.

Offset Values
Load Point - Specifies the support load point of each point used to calculate the bracket system
plane. Offsets are measured from the load points. Load points are defined in the profile
cross-section symbols. If one of the supports is a plate system, then the load point value is 0. For
more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).

U Offset - Specifies the offset along the local U axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 274

 Placing Plate Systems

V Offset - Specifies the offset along the local V axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
Override - Select to specify different values for Load Point, U Offset and V Offset.

Lapped Status
Displays the status of each bracket support. Lapped is selected if the support is lapped. This
value is set during bracket creation and cannot be changed here.

Advanced Plate System

Creates specialized, complex, such as side plates, ring plates, transition plates, continuity
plates, and buckling plates.

With this command, you create a predefined plate using an advanced plate system macro or
define your own custom plate using geometric construction interfaces.

Using Advanced Plate Systems with Members

Most advanced plate systems are used with standard and built-up members created with Place
Linear Member in the Molded Forms or Structure tasks. Member flanges and webs are
trimmed (rebounded) and connected to the advanced plate system. As an example, when you
insert an advanced plate system along the length of a standard (rolled) member, typically on the
flange, the software creates a penetration connectionbetween the standard member and the
advanced plate system.

When you use Execute Detailing to detail the plate, the software automatically creates all
connections and penetration seams.
When you modify an existing member, you also must modify connections and trimming by
selecting a port and using the Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection ribbon in the
Molded Forms and Structural Detailing tasks.

Molded Forms User's Guide 275

 Placing Plate Systems

For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on page 787) and Edit assembly
connection ports (on page 971).

Using Geometric Constructions

When an advanced plate system macro is not available, geometric construction interfaces can be
used to create custom plate systems. You can use multiple geometric constructions in sequence.
For example, you can create points, create curves from the points, and then create a surface
from the curves. Geometric constructions are available by clicking Plate Definition by 3D on
the ribbon.

Advanced Plate System Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The initial properties default from the selected structural
specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information see Advanced Plate
System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro.
 APS Icon Browser - Graphically displays the available advanced plate system
macros. For more information, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page
283).
 More - Displays a list of the available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
The software displays recently selected macros in the list.
Plate Definition by 3D
Allows the creation of plate geometry directly in a graphic view by using the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, the Geometric Construction ribbon, and the Geometric
Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to Sketch 2D and is only available
when Construction is selected for Macro Definition. For more information, see Geometric
Constructions (on page 1027).

Select Supports
Returns the ribbon to the options available for the selected macro. This option is only
available after the initial definition of the advance plate system.

Define Boundaries
Sets the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary curves. If you
select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes
the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See Define Boundary Controls below.

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,

then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 276

 Placing Plate Systems

This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.

Molded Forms User's Guide 277

 Placing Plate Systems

Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use Define Boundaries .

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane

Molded Forms User's Guide 278

 Placing Plate Systems

Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use Boundary Curve .
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.

Molded Forms User's Guide 279

 Placing Plate Systems

Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

What do you want to do?

 Place a side plate (on page 288)
 Place a side plate with sniped corners (on page 294)
 Place an axial side plate (on page 298)
 Place a ring plate (on page 305)

Molded Forms User's Guide 280

 Placing Plate Systems

 Place a ring plate with sniped corners (on page 312)

 Place a ring plate with radial edges (on page 319)
 Place a transition plate (on page 332)
 Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
 Place a gap transition plate between webs (on page 339)
 Place a continuity plate (on page 325)
 Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member (on page 344)
 Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates (on page 349)
 Place a buckling plate along a member (on page 355)
 Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection (on page 360)
 Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member (on page 365)
 Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 371)
 Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 375)
 Place a knuckled bracket (on page 382)
 Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 388)
 Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members (on page 392)
 Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 396)
 Place a column insert plate along a member (on page 400)
 Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members (on page 405)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions (on page 282)
 Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions (on page 282)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Modify an advanced plate system

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the advanced plate system to modify.
The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.

4. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon for the advanced plate system macro displays.

5. Click Select on the ribbon.

6. Change the required inputs and parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 281

 Placing Plate Systems

7. Click Continue.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
8. Click Finish.

Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions

The following workflow is general. The macros to use can vary.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.
2. Select Construction from the Macro Definition list.
-OR-
If Construction was selected earlier in the same session, and is visible in the Macro
Definition list, click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.
3. If required, select a point geometric construction interface.
4. Follow the system prompts and create the points.
5. Click Continue.
The Geometric Construction Explorer shows a list of points.
6. Select a curve geometric construction interface.
7. Follow the system prompts and select points to create the needed curves. Select the points
from the graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the Geometric Construction Explorer.
8. Click Continue.
A list of curves is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
9. Select a surface geometric construction interface.
10. Follow the system prompts and select curves to create a surface. Select the curves from the
graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the Geometric Construction Explorer.
11. Click Continue.
A surface is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
12. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
13. Create boundaries for the plate system as required. Boundaries create connections between
plates.
14. Click Finish.
The software creates a plate system using the geometric construction surface.

Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.

Molded Forms User's Guide 282

 Placing Plate Systems

2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.

3. Select the advanced plate system to modify.
The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.
4. Click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.

5. Click Select on the ribbon.

6. Select the geometry on the Geometric Construction Explorer or select a numbered input
step on the ribbon.
The geometry highlights in the graphic view.
7. Make the required changes.
8. To delete geometry, click Delete .
9. Click Continue.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
10. Click Finish.

Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box

Specifies an advanced plate system macro to use. The dialog box displays when you click APS
Icon Browser in the Macro Definition list. Each tab of the palette graphically displays options
available for a type of macro in the Catalog database. After you select a macro, the appropriate
options display on the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Filters
Limits the available macros on a tab to the selected type.
Clear Recent
Removes recently selected macros from the Recent tab.
Help
Displays help for the selected macro in a preview window. If no help is available, a preview of
the selected macro displays.
You can also select Tools > Automatic Preview to display the preview window.
Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 284)
Ring Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 301)
Continuity Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 321)
Transition Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 328)
Buckling Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 341)
Brackets Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 378)
Insert Plate Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 385)

Molded Forms User's Guide 283

 Placing Plate Systems

The Recent tab displays macros recently selected on the other tabs. Click Clear
Recent to remove interfaces from this tab.

Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macros create side plates, which reinforce one or more
members sharing a nodal connection. A nodal connection is typically a construction assembly
between built-up members and consists of side plates or ring plates, transition plates, and
continuity plates.

Side Plate - Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming
members that share a nodal connection. The corners of the side plate are
square. For more information, see Side Plate (on page 284).

Side Plate 2 - Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of

incoming members that share a nodal connection. The corners of the side plate
are sniped. For more information, see Side Plate 2 (on page 290).

Side Plate Axial - Creates a side plate axially on a supported member at its
nodal connection with a supporting member. For more information, see Side
Plate Axial (on page 296).

Side Plate

Molded Forms User's Guide 284

 Placing Plate Systems

Tooltip: SidePlate
Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection. The corners of the side plate are square.
The physical axes of the members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common end
point is the node. You must have at least two members with non-collinear axes. The incoming
flange and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the software trims theincoming
flange and web parts by the edges of the side plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:

 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first selected member oriented from the nodal point to the
other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second selected member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross-product of X-axis by Y-axis.
The type of free edge on the side plate depends on the angle between the axes of two adjacent
members.

Side Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Molded Forms User's Guide 285

 Placing Plate Systems

 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the primary members that support the side plate. These members can be rolled
members or built-up members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end
points. Select the first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first
member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate. The second member that you select
defines the Y-axis for the side plate.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 286

 Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

If the angle between the members is less than 175

degrees, the following free edge is created:

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
If the angle between the members is between 175 and 3 - Cutback
180 degrees, then the following free edge is created:
4 - Arm length

Weld Toe - Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the side plate
free edges.
Fillet - Specifies the radius of the fillet between two successive line segments of the side plate
free edge.
Arm Length - Specifies the distance between the line perpendicular to the bisector of the two
member axes and the intersection point between the two member edges. This parameter is only
used if the angle between the members is between 175 and 180 degrees.
Cutback - Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members away from the fillet of the
side plate free edge.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 287

 Placing Plate Systems

Side - Specifies the flange location of the side plate. Select Front or Back.

What do you want to do?

 Place a side plate (on page 288)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a side plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlate.
The Side Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members that support the side plate. Select the
members in clockwise or counter-clockwise consecutive order.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the side plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 288

 Placing Plate Systems

5. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Fillet, Arm Length, and Cutback.
6. Select the flange location of the side plate from the Side list.
7. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 289

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Side Plate 2

.
Tooltip: SidePlate2
Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection. The corners of the side plate are sniped.

Molded Forms User's Guide 290

 Placing Plate Systems

The physical axes of the members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common end
point is the node. You must have at least two members with non-collinear axes. The incoming
flange and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the software trims the incoming
flange and web parts by the edges of the side plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:

 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first selected member oriented from the nodal point to the
other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second selected member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross-product of X-axis by Y-axis.
The type of free edge on the side plate depends on the angle between the axes of two adjacent
members.

Side Plate 2 Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 291

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Specifies the primary members that support the side plate. These members can be rolled
members or built-up members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end
points. Select the first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first
member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate. The second member that you select
defines the Y-axis for the side plate.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 292

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Cutback 2
5 - Slope ratio

Weld Toe - Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the side plate
free edges.
Fillet - Specifies the radius of the fillet between two successive line segments of the side plate
free edge.
Cutback - Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members away from the fillet of the
side plate free edge.
Cutback 2 - Specifies the distance to cut back the second line of incoming members away from
the fillet of the side plate free edge.
Slope Ratio - Specifies the slope of sniped corners at the side plate free edges.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Side - Specifies the flange location of the side plate. Select Front or Back.

What do you want to do?

 Place a side plate with sniped corners (on page 294)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 293

 Placing Plate Systems

Place a side plate with sniped corners

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlate2.
The Side Plate 2 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members that support the side plate. Select the
members in clockwise or counter-clockwise consecutive order.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the side plate.

5. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Fillet, Slope Ratio, Cutback, and Cutback 2.
6. Select the flange location of the side plate from the Side list.
7. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 294

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate 2 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 295

 Placing Plate Systems

Side Plate Axial

Tooltip: SidePlateAxial
Creates a side plate by connecting the flange on an incoming intercostal supported member that
share a nodal connection with a continuous supporting member.
The physical axes of the members are coplanar. The end point of the supported member is the
node with the supporting member. The software trims the incoming flange and web plate parts of
the supported member. For built-up members, the software trims the incoming flange and web
parts of the supported member by the edges of the side plate.

Side Plate Axial Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting member. This member can be a rolled member or a built-up member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 296

 Placing Plate Systems

2 - Specifies the supported member. This member can be a rolled member or a built-up member.
The physical axis must be coplanar with and nodally connected to the supporting member.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 297

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Supporting member
2 - Supported member
3 - Length
4 - Chamfer length
5 - Chamfer width
6 - Setback
7 - Axial side plate

Length - Specifies the length of the side plate.

Chamfer Length - Specifies the length of sniped corners at the free edges of the side plate.
Chamfer Width - Specifies the width of sniped corners at the free edges of the side plate.
Setback - Specifies the distance to set back sniped corners from the end of the side plate.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate relative to the member major
axis. Select Top to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Bottom to
place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place an axial side plate (on page 298)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place an axial side plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlateAxial.
The Side Plate Axial ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 298

 Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member.

5. Select the supported member.

6. Type values for Length, Chamfer Length, Chamfer Width, and Setback.
7. Select the location of the side plate from the Side list.
8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 299

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate Axial ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 300

 Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macros create ring plates, which reinforce one or more
members sharing a nodal connection and penetrated by a perpendicular cylindrical member. A
nodal connection is typically a construction assembly between built-up members and consists of
side plates or ring plates, transition plates, and continuity plates.

Ring Plate 1 - Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of

incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are square.
For more information, see Ring Plate 1 (on page 301).

Ring Plate 2 - Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of

incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are sniped. For
more information, see Ring Plate 2 (on page 308).

Ring Plate 3- Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of

incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The ring plate has a continuous radial edge
between members. For more information, see Ring Plate 3 (on page 315).

Ring Plate 1

Tooltip: RingPlate
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are
square.

Molded Forms User's Guide 301

 Placing Plate Systems

The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:

1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.
 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.
2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 1 Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 302

 Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member, but it must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected
in step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the ring plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 303

 Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Offset

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.

Molded Forms User's Guide 304

 Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the free
edge ring plate.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Support
Specifies the flange location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.
Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?

 Place a ring plate (on page 305)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate1.
The Ring Plate 1 ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 305

 Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, in clockwise or counter-clockwise

consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.

6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This can be a rolled or built-up
member. The member must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for
1, and it must pass through the node point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 306

 Placing Plate Systems

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, and Cutback.
8. Select the flange location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the connection of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 1 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 307

 Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plate 2

Tooltip: RingPlate2
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are
sniped.
The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:

1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 308

 Placing Plate Systems

 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.

2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 2 Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member, but it must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected
in step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 309

 Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 310

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Cutback 2
5 - Offset
6 - Slope Ratio

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.
Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the ring
plate free edge.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Cutback 2
Specifies the distance to cut back the second line of incoming members from the fillet.
Slope Ratio
Specifies the slope of sniped corners at the ring plate free edges.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 311

 Placing Plate Systems

Support
Specifies the location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.
Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?

 Place a ring plate with sniped corners (on page 312)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate with sniped corners

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate2.
The Ring Plate 2 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, n clockwise or counter-clockwise
consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 312

 Placing Plate Systems

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.

6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for 1,
and it must pass through the node point.

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, Slope Ratio, Cutback, and Cutback
2.
8. Select the flange location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the continuity of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 313

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 2 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 314

 Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plate 3

Tooltip: RingPlate3
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The ring plate has a large fillet
radius between non-colinear incoming members.
The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:

1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.
 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.
2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member

Molded Forms User's Guide 315

 Placing Plate Systems

 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 3 Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected in
step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

Molded Forms User's Guide 316

 Placing Plate Systems

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 317

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Offset

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.
Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the ring
plate free edge.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Support

Molded Forms User's Guide 318

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.

Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?

 Place a ring plate with radial edges (on page 319)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate with radial edges

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate3.
The Ring Plate 3 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 319

 Placing Plate Systems

 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.

6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or built
up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for 1, and it
must pass through the node.

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, and Cutback.
8. Select the location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the continuity of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 320

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 3 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Continuity Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macro creates continuity plates between side or ring plates
and along the webs of supported members. Continuity plates are typically used to create offshore
nodal connections between built-up members in combination with transition plates, sides plates,
and ring plates.

Molded Forms User's Guide 321

 Placing Plate Systems

Continuity Plate - Creates a plate along supported member webs at the

connection with supporting members and between top and bottom side plates
or ring plates. For more information, see Continuity Plate (on page 322).

Continuity Plate

Tooltip: ContinuityPlate
Creates a plate along supported member webs at the connection with supporting members and
between top and bottom side plates or ring plates. Continuity plates are typically used to create
offshore nodal connections between built-up members in combination with transition plates, sides
plates, and ring plates.

Continuity Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Molded Forms User's Guide 322

 Placing Plate Systems

 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

1 - Specifies the supported member with which to establish the continuity.

2 - Specifies the transition plate with which to limit the length of the continuity plate.
3 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
4 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.
5 - Specifies the supporting member to use as a reference for the Location parameter. In the
above figure, you can select either supporting member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 323

 Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Location - Specifies the location of the continuity plate with respect to the selected reference
member 5. Select Near, Far, or Centered.

Molded Forms User's Guide 324

 Placing Plate Systems

Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

What do you want to do?

 Place a continuity plate (on page 325)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a continuity plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. At the nodal connection, create two ring plates or side plates.
Place a ring plate (on page 305)
Place a side plate (on page 288)
4. At the nodal connection, create a transition plate.
Place a transition plate (on page 332)
5. On the Continuity Plates tab, click ContinuityPlate.
The Continuity Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 325

 Placing Plate Systems

6. In a graphic view, select the supported member.

7. Select the transition plate.

8. Select the first side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 326

 Placing Plate Systems

9. Select the second side or ring plate.

10. Select the supporting member to use as a reference for Location.

11. Select the location of the continuity plate in the Location list.
12. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate display in the
graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

13. If the plate preview does not display on the correct side of the supported member, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 327

 Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Continuity Plate ribbon.

b. Select another option from the Location list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned continuity plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

14. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
15. Click Finish.
The software creates the continuity plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Transition Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macros create transition plates between side or ring plates,
and along the webs of supporting members. Transition plates are typically used to create
offshore nodal connections between built-up members in combination with continuity plates,
sides plates, and ring plates.

Transition Plate - Creates a plate along supporting member webs between top
and bottom side plates or ring plates. For more information, see Transition
Plate (on page 329).

Gap Transition Plate - Creates a plate to fill the gap between the webs or
flanges of two profile systems or members of differing dimensions. For more
information, see Gap Transition Plate (on page 334).

Molded Forms User's Guide 328

 Placing Plate Systems

Transition Plate

Tooltip: TransitionPlate
Creates a plate used to transition along the webs of supporting members and between sets of
side or ring plates. Transition plates are typically used to create offshore nodal connections
between built-up members in combination with continuity plates, sides plates, and ring plates.

Transition Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Molded Forms User's Guide 329

 Placing Plate Systems

 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

1 - Specifies the first member with which to establish the transition.

2 - Specifies the second opposing and collinear member with which to establish the transition.
3 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
4 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Molded Forms User's Guide 330

 Placing Plate Systems

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Side - Specifies the location of the transition plate with respect to the computed coordinate
system. Select Bottom, Top, or Centered.

What do you want to do?

 Place a transition plate (on page 332)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 331

 Placing Plate Systems

Place a transition plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. At the nodal connection, create two ring plates or side plates.
Place a ring plate (on page 305)
Place a side plate (on page 288)
4. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlate.
The Transition Plate ribbon displays.
5. In a graphic view, select the first supporting member with which to establish the transition.

6. Select the second collinear member with which to establish the transition.

Molded Forms User's Guide 332

 Placing Plate Systems

7. Select the first side or ring plate.

8. Select the second side or ring plate.

9. Select the location of the transition plate from the Side list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct side of the supporting members, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 333

 Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Transition Plate ribbon.

b. Select another option from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned transition plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the transition plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Gap Transition Plate

Tooltip: TransitionPlateGap
Creates a plate to fill the gap between the webs or flanges of two profile systems or members of
differing dimensions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 334

 Placing Plate Systems

Gap Transition Plates Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first member or profile system with which to establish the transition.
2 - Specifies the second member or profile system with which to establish the transition.
- Optionally, select a bounding plate system. Typically, you select a plate system or a flange
when creating a transition plate web.
- Optionally, select a second bounding plate system. Typically, you select a plate system or a
flange when creating a transition plate web.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 335

 Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Location - Specifies the location of the continuity plate with respect to the selected members.
Select one of the following options:

1 - Top
2 - Bottom
3 - Left
4 - Right
5 - Centered-horiz
6 - Centered-vert

 Top - Transitions between the top flanges of profile systems or members, or between the
bottom walls of box members.
 Bottom - Transitions between the bottom flanges of profile systems or members, or between
the bottom walls of box members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 336

 Placing Plate Systems

 Left - Transitions between the left side walls of box members.

 Right - Transitions between the right side walls of box members.
 Centered-horiz - Transitions between interior horizontal stiffeners of profile systems or
members.
 Centered-vert - Transitions between the webs of profile systems or members, or between
the interior horizontal stiffeners of box members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
 Place a gap transition plate between webs (on page 339)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a gap transition plate between flanges

In this workflow, a gap transition plate is placed between flanges of two marine profile systems.
The parent plate system is hidden in the illustrations.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlateGap.
The Gap Transition Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 337

 Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the second profile system.

6. Select Top on the Location list.

7. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates the gap transition plate between the profile flanges.

Molded Forms User's Guide 338

 Placing Plate Systems

Place a gap transition plate between webs

In this workflow, a gap transition plate is placed between webs of two marine profile systems.
The parent plate system is hidden in the illustrations.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. Create the gap transition plate between the profile flanges.
Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
4. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlateGap.
The Gap Transition Plate ribbon displays.
5. In a graphic view, select the first profile system.

6. Select the second profile system.

7. Click .

Molded Forms User's Guide 339

 Placing Plate Systems

8. Select the parent plate system to bound the transition plate.

9. Click .
10. Select the flange transition plate to bound the opposite side of the transition plate.

11. Select Centered-vert on the Location list.

12. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

13. If the plate preview does not display in the correct location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 340

 Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Gap Transition Plate ribbon.

b. Select another option from the Location list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display
returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

14. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
15. Click Finish.
The software creates the gap transition plate between the profile webs.

Buckling Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macros create buckling plates on members or at nodal
connections. A buckling plate stiffens the web and flange of a member. The buckling plate can be
positioned by and bounded to plates sharing a nodal connection with the member, or can be
defined by dimensions.

Boxed Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a

built-up boxed member. For more information, see Boxed Member Buckling
Plate (on page 342).

Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate aligned with one or two flanges of
built-up members or with continuity plates. For more information, see Buckling
Plate (on page 347).

Buckling Plate along Member - Creates a buckling plate along a member at a

nodal connection. For more information, see Buckling Plate along Member (on
page 353).

Molded Forms User's Guide 341

 Placing Plate Systems

Rolled Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate at the intersection of

the flanges of a rolled member with a nodal connection. For more information,
see Rolled Member Buckling Plate (on page 358).

Tubular Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a

built-up tubular member. For more information, see Tubular Member Buckling
Plate (on page 363).

Partial Buckling Plate - Creates a partial buckling plate on one side of the web
of a member and on one flange of the member. For more information, see
Partial Buckling Plate (on page 368).

One-sided Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on one side of the web of
a member. For more information, see One-sided Buckling Plate (on page 373).

Boxed Member Buckling Plate

Molded Forms User's Guide 342

 Placing Plate Systems

Tooltip: Buckling_Box
Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a built-up boxed member. To locate the buckling plate,
you specify the offset distance from the start node of the member.

Boxed Member Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the built-up boxed member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 343

 Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member (on page 344)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 344

 Placing Plate Systems

3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click Buckling_Box.

The Boxed Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a built-up boxed member. The name of this member type typically
starts with BUBox....
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required offset value for Distance, and then click Accept .
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the

Molded Forms User's Guide 345

 Placing Plate Systems

Advanced Plate System ribbon.

7. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Boxed Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 346

 Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate

Tooltip:BucklingPlate
Creates a buckling plate aligned with one or two flanges of built-up members or with continuity
plates. The buckling plate typically stiffens a transition plate and is limited (bounded) by two side
plates.
If you specify one flange or continuity plate, then the buckling plate is positioned at the point at
which the plate intersects the first side plate and orients normal to nodal connection plates. In the
following example, the continuity plate is yellow, and the buckling plate is green.

If you specify two flanges or continuity plates, then the buckling plate is positioned between the
intersection of the first flange and the first side plate, and the intersection of the second flange
and the second side plate. In the following example, the continuity plates are yellow, and the
buckling plate is green.

Molded Forms User's Guide 347

 Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first built-up flange or continuity plate with which to align the buckling plate.
2 - Specifies the first bounding plate, such as a side plate or a built-up flange.
3 - Specifies the second bounding plate, such as a side plate or a built-up flange.
- (Optional) Specifies a second built-up flange or continuity plate with which to align the
buckling plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a second lateral bounding plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 348

 Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates (on page 349)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate.
The Buckling Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 349

 Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a built-up member flange or continuity plate incoming to the side or
ring plate of a nodal connection. Flanges are used in the following example.

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 350

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays.

7. Optionally, click , and then select a second built-up member flange or continuity plate
incoming to the side or ring plate.
The geometric constructions adjust to transition between the two flanges.

8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 351

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 352

 Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate along Member

Tooltip: BucklingPlate0
Creates a buckling plate along a member at a nodal connection. To locate the buckling plate, you
specify the offset distance from the node of the nodal connection.

Buckling Plate along Member Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the rolled or built-up member incoming to a nodal connection.
2 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
3 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 353

 Placing Plate Systems

- Optionally, select a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.

- Optionally, select a second lateral bounding plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance from - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the node of the
nodal connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 354

 Placing Plate Systems

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate along a member (on page 355)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate0.
The Buckling Plate along Member ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a rolled or built-up member.

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 355

 Placing Plate Systems

The geometric constructions used to create the plate display in the graphic view.

7. Type the required offset value for Distance from, and click Accept .
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 356

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Buckling Plate along Member ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance from, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 357

 Placing Plate Systems

Rolled Member Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlate1r
Creates a buckling plate at the intersection of the flanges of a rolled member with a nodal
connection. The buckling plate orients normal to nodal connection plates.

Rolled Member Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the rolled member incoming to the nodal connection.
2 - Specifies the first bounding plate, such as a side plate or an insert plate.
3 - Specifies the second bounding plate, such as a side plate or an insert plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a second lateral bounding plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 358

 Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Location - Specifies the web of the member for placement of the buckling plate. Select Inside or
Outside.

Molded Forms User's Guide 359

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Inside
2 - Outside

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection (on page 360)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate1r.
The Rolled Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a rolled member incoming to the side or ring plate of a nodal
connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 360

 Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

7. Select the required value for Location, and click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 361

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Inside
2 - Outside

8. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate
display in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System
ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display at the required flange, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Rolled Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select a new value for Location, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new location, displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 362

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

12. Repeat the previous steps to place a buckling plate at the other rolled member flange.

Tubular Member Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlateForTube
Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a built-up tubular member. To locate the buckling plate,
you specify the offset distance from the start or end node of the member.

Tubular Member Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 363

 Placing Plate Systems

Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the built-up tubular member.
- Select the member node used for offset distance measurement. The start node is the
default selection.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 364

 Placing Plate Systems

Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the selected node of
the member.

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member (on page 365)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlateForTube.
The Tubular Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a built-up tubular member. The name of this member type typically
starts with BUTube....

Molded Forms User's Guide 365

 Placing Plate Systems

The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. If a different node is needed, click , and then select the node.

The new node highlights, and the intersection plane offsets from the new node.

6. Type the required offset value for Distance, and click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 366

 Placing Plate Systems

The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
7. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Tubular Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance, click Accept , and then click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 367

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Partial Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlatePartial
Creates a partial buckling plate on one side of the web of a member and on one flange of the
member. To locate the buckling plate, you specify the offset distance from the start node of the
member.

Partial Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 368

 Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the member. Select a rolled or a built-up member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 369

 Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Offset - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height 1
5 - Height 2
6 - Radius
7 - Top/Bottom
8 - Near/Far

Height 1 - Specifies the distance from the flange on the connected edge to the transition point.
Height 2 - Specifies the distance from the free edge of the buckling plate to the transition point.
Height 1 plus Height 2 is the total height of the partial buckling plate.
Weld Toe 1 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member top flange and the
buckling plate free edge at Height 1.
Weld Toe 2 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member web and the
buckling plate free edge at Height 2.
Radius - Specifies the interior corner radius.
Top/Bottom - Specifies the flange for placement of the connected edge. Select Top or Bottom.
Near/Far - Specifies the side of the member web for placement of the buckling plate. Select Near
or Far.

What do you want to do?

 Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 371)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 370

 Placing Plate Systems

Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlatePartial.
The Partial Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a member.
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required distance value for Offset, and press TAB.
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Type the required values for Height 1, Height 2, Weld Toe 1, Weld Toe 2, and Radius.

Molded Forms User's Guide 371

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height 1
5 - Height 2
6 - Radius
7 - Top/Bottom
8 - Near/Far

7. Select the required flange in the Top/Bottom box.

8. Select the required web side in the Near/Far box.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Partial Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select new values for Near/Far and Top/Bottom, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new web side and flange side, displays in the graphic
view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 372

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

One-sided Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlateOneSide
Creates a buckling plate on one side of the web of a member. To locate the buckling plate, you
specify the offset distance from the start node of the member.

One-sided Buckling Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 373

 Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the member. Select a rolled or a built-up member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 374

 Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Offset - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height
5 - Near/Far

Weld Toe 1 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member top flange and the
free edge of the buckling plate.
Weld Toe 2 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member bottom flange and
the free edge of the buckling plate.
Height - Specifies the distance from the bottom flange to the transition point. This option is
applicable when the values of Weld Toe 1 and Weld Toe 2 differ.
Near/Far - Specifies the side of the member web for placement of the buckling plate. Select Near
or Far.

What do you want to do?

 Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 375)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlateOneSide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 375

 Placing Plate Systems

The One-sided Buckling Plate ribbon displays.

4. In a graphic view, select a member.
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required distance value for Offset, and press TAB.
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Type the required values for Weld Toe 1, Weld Toe 2, and Height.

Molded Forms User's Guide 376

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height
5 - Near/Far

7. Select the required web side in the Near/Far box.

8. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the One-sided Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select a new value for Near/Far, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new web side, displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 377

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

Brackets Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macro creates a bracket plate between supporting profile
stiffeners systems and a supporting plate system.

Knuckled Bracket - Creates a bracket plate containing a knuckle when the

webs of supporting profiles are not coplanar. For more information, see
Knuckled Bracket (on page 379).

Molded Forms User's Guide 378

 Placing Plate Systems

Knuckled Bracket

Tooltip: KnuckledBracket
Creates a bracket plate containing a knuckle when the webs of supporting profiles are not
coplanar. A bracket stiffens profile stiffeners and a supporting plate.
If the supports for a bracket are coplanar and a knuckled bracket is not needed, use
Bracket Plate System . For more information, see Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Knuckled Bracket Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first profile system support. The widest side of the knuckle is along this system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 379

 Placing Plate Systems

2 - Specifies the second profile system support.

3 - Specifies the plate system support.
4 - Specifies the coordinate system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, select the
coordinate system to use for justification of the bracket.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 380

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - First profile system

2 - Second profile system
3 - Plate system
4 - Knuckle height for partial knuckle
5 - Left for Justif #1 and Justif #2, and
direction of negative value for U-offset
#1 and U-offset #2.
6 - Right for Justif #1 and Justif #2, and
direction of positive value for U-offset #1
and U-offset #2.
7 - Bracket
8 - Bracket knuckle
9 - Positive/negative directions for
Orientation.

Auto Preview - Specifies whether a preview of the bracket displays. The preview updates as
options are changed. Select On or Off.
Orientation - Specifies the direction of the bracket relative to the selected plate system 3 and the
selected coordinate system 4.
Width - Specifies the width of the bracket as measured from the plate system.
Knuckle Type - Specifies whether the knuckle extends to the full height of the plate. Select
Partial to define a height of the knuckle from profile system 1. Select Full to define the height of
the knuckle the full height between profile systems 1 and 2.
Knuckle Height - Defines the height of the knuckle from profile system 1. This option is only
available when Full is selected for Knuckle Type.
Justif #1 - Specifies the justification of the bracket on the flange of profile system 1. Select
Centered to center the bracket on the flange. Select Left to position the bracket on the left side
of the flange. Select Right to position the bracket on the right side of the flange. Left and Right
are defined by looking toward the free edge of the bracket when the top of your view is toward
support and are independent of the secondary orientation of the profile system supports. The
default value is Centered.
U-offset #1 - Specifies the distance to offset the bracket on the flange of profile system 1. A
positive value offsets the bracket to the right when looking toward the free edge of the bracket. A
negative value offsets the bracket to the left when looking toward the free edge of the bracket.
The maximum value is one-half of the flange width.
Justif #2 - Specifies the justification of the bracket on the flange of profile system 2. Select
Centered to center the bracket on the flange. Select Left to position the bracket on the left side
of the flange. Select Right to position the bracket on the right side of the flange. Left and Right
are defined by looking toward the free edge of the bracket and are independent of the secondary
orientation of the profile system. The default value is Centered.
U-offset #2 - Specifies the distance to offset the bracket on the flange of profile system 2. A
positive value offsets the bracket to the right when looking toward the free edge of the bracket. A
negative value offsets the bracket to the left when looking toward the free edge of the bracket.
The maximum value is one-half of the flange width.

Molded Forms User's Guide 381

 Placing Plate Systems

What do you want to do?

 Place a knuckled bracket (on page 382)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a knuckled bracket

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Brackets tab, click KnuckledBracket.
The Knuckled Bracket ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first profile system support. The widest side of the knuckle is
along this system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 382

 Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the second profile system support.

6. Select the plate system support.

7. Select the coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 383

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the geometric constructions used to create the bracket displays in the graphic
view.

8. If the bracket is not on the required side of the plate system, select an axis in the opposite
direction in the Orientation box. For example, in the previous figure, if -x is the value, then
select +x to switch the bracket to the other side of the plate.
9. Type the required value for Width.
10. Select the knuckle type. If it is a partial knuckle, type a value for Knuckle Height.
11. Set values for justification (Justif #1 and Justif #2) and offset (U-offset #1 and U-offset #2)
at each end of the bracket.
12. Click Continue.
A preview of the bracket displays in the graphic view, and the Advanced Plate System
ribbon returns.

If changes to the bracket parameters are needed, click Select Supports to

return to the Knuckled Bracket ribbon, and repeat the previous steps.
13. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 384

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the knuckled bracket.

Insert Plate Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)

The following advanced plate system macros create insert plates, which reinforce intersecting
members or supported and supporting members.
If the members share a nodal connection, use a side plate. For more information, see
Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 284).

Cross Insert Plate - Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between

supporting and supported members. For more information, see Cross Insert
Plate (on page 386).

Cross Insert Plate 1 - Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between

intersecting members. For more information, see Cross Insert Plate 1 (on page
390).

Tee Insert Plate - Creates a tee-shaped insert plate between supported and
supporting members. For more information, see Tee Insert Plate (on page
394).

Molded Forms User's Guide 385

 Placing Plate Systems

Column Insert Plate - Creates an insert plate along a member flange and at
the end of a column or brace. For more information, see Column Insert Plate
(on page 398).

Column Tee Insert Plate - Creates an insert plate between intersecting

members and at the end of a column or brace. For more information, see
Column Tee Insert Plate (on page 403).

Cross Insert Plate

Tooltip: CrossInsertPlate
Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between supporting and supported members.

Cross Insert Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 386

 Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies a supporting member. The member can be continuous or two connected members.
2 - Specifies the first supported member.
3 - Specifies the second supported member that is colinear with the first supported member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns

Molded Forms User's Guide 387

 Placing Plate Systems

to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
supported and supporting members.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 388)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click CrossInsertPlate.
The Cross Insert Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member or two connected members.

5. Click 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 388

 Placing Plate Systems

6. Select the first supported member.

7. Select the second supported member.

8. Type the required values for Length and Radius.

9. Select the flange location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

Molded Forms User's Guide 389

 Placing Plate Systems

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Cross Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Cross Insert Plate 1

Tooltip: CrossInsertPlate1
Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between intersecting members.

Cross Insert Plate 1 Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 390

 Placing Plate Systems

Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).

Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first intersecting member. The member can be continuous or two connected
members.
2 - Specifies the second intersecting member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 391

 Placing Plate Systems

Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
intersecting members.
Width - Specifies the width of the insert plate centered along each member flange.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members (on page 392)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click CrossInsertPlate1.
The Cross Insert Plate 1 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first intersecting member or two connected members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 392

 Placing Plate Systems

5. Click 2.
6. Select the second intersecting member.

7. Type the required values for Length, Width, and Radius.

8. Select the location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Cross Insert Plate 1 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 393

 Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the insert plate.

Tee Insert Plate

Tooltip: TInsertPlate
Creates a tee-shaped insert plate between a supported and a supporting member.

Tee Insert Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 394

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Specifies a supporting member. The member can be continuous or two connected members.
2 - Specifies the first supported member.
3 - Specifies the second supported member that is colinear with the first supported member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
supported and supporting members.
Width - Specifies the width of the insert plate centered along each member flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 395

 Placing Plate Systems

Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 396)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click TInsertPlate.
The Tee Insert Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member or two connected members.

5. Click 2.
6. Select the supported member.

7. Type the required values for Length, Width, and Radius.

Molded Forms User's Guide 396

 Placing Plate Systems

8. Select the location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Tee Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 397

 Placing Plate Systems

Column Insert Plate

Tooltip: InsertPlate
Creates an insert plate along a member flange and at the end of one or more columns or braces.

Column Insert Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting beam member or edge reinforcement. The member can be a rolled
member or a built-up member.
2 - Specifies the column or brace connected to the supporting member.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary columns or braces that are also attached to the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 398

 Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 399

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Length Offset
2 - Width Offset
3 - Offset
4 - Slope

Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length Offset - Specifies the distance of the connected edge of the insert plate from the column
along the length of the supporting member.
Width Offset - Specifies the distance of the free edge of the insert plate from the column.
Offset - Specifies the distance of the snipe corner from the edge of the supporting member
flange.
Slope - Specifies the angle of the sniped corners.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a column insert plate along a member (on page 400)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a column insert plate along a member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click InsertPlate.
The Column Insert Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 400

 Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a continuous beam member.

5. Select the column or brace.

6. Optionally, click , and select secondary columns or braces.

7. Type the required values for Length Offset, Width Offset, Offset, and Slope.

1 - Length Offset
2 - Width Offset
3 - Offset
4 - Slope

8. Select the member side for the insert plate from the Location list.
9. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 401

 Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Column Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Location list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 402

 Placing Plate Systems

Column Tee Insert Plate

Tooltip: TInsertPlate1
Creates an insert plate between a supported and a supporting member and, optionally, at the end
of a column or brace.

Column Tee Insert Plate Ribbon

Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting beam member. The member can be a rolled member or a built-up
member.
2 - Specifies the supported beam member. The member can be a rolled member or a built-up
member.
- (Optional) Specifies the column or brace connected to the supporting member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 403

 Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 404

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Offset 1
2 - Offset 2
3 - Offset

Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Offset 1 - Specifies the distance of the edges of the insert plate from the flange of the supporting
member.
Offset 2 - Specifies the distance of the edges of the insert plate from the flange of the supported
member.
Offset - Specifies the distance of the snipe corner from the edge of the supporting and supported
member flanges.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?

 Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members (on page 405)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click TInsertPlate1.
The Column Tee Insert Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 405

 Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a continuous supporting beam member.

5. Select the supported beam member.

6. Optionally, click , and select a column or brace connected to the supporting member.

7. Type the required values for Offset 1, Offset 2, and Offset.

Molded Forms User's Guide 406

 Placing Plate Systems

1 - Offset 1
2 - Offset 2
3 - Offset

8. Select the member side for the insert plate from the Location list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

The ribbon display returns to the Column Tee Insert Plate ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 407

 Placing Plate Systems

b. Select the opposite location from the Location list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Select Macro Dialog Box

Specifies an advanced plate system macro to use. The dialog box displays when you click More
in the Macro Definition list. Macros in the catalog database are displayed in a hierarchical list.
After you select a macro, the appropriate options display on the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
This dialog box displays the same macros as the Advanced Plate System dialog box as a list.
For information on the macro types, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf advanced plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 408

 Placing Plate Systems

 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 409)
Material Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 412)
Molded Conventions Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 412)
Relationships Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 426)

Main Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 409

 Placing Plate Systems

StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system

name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 410

 Placing Plate Systems

Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active - Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition, because
connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid connections
in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state, select Yes; however,
to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For information on leaf
systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on page 30) in the Molded
Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 411

 Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the default material settings for the advanced plate system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the advanced plate system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Molded Forms User's Guide 412

 Placing Plate Systems

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 413

 Placing Plate Systems

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 414

 Placing Plate Systems

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles

Molded Forms User's Guide 415

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.

Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 416

 Placing Plate Systems

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 417

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset

Molded Forms User's Guide 418

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 419

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 420

 Placing Plate Systems

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction

Molded Forms User's Guide 421

 Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 422

 Placing Plate Systems

In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 423

 Placing Plate Systems

plate system to place the profiles.

With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for

Molded Forms User's Guide 424

 Placing Plate Systems

designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 425

 Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Relationships Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays a list of objects related to the plate system. Select General, Boundaries, Bounds, or
Connections as the relationship category from the list on the right.
List color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for all items in the list.
Item color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for a selected item in the list.
Name - Displays the name of the related object.
Type - Displays the type of related object.
Go To - Displays the properties of the selected object.
In the following example, the advanced plate system in magenta, the list color is red, and the
color of the item selected in the list is yellow.

Child Plate System

The Child Plate System command creates a plate system that is a child to and in the same
plane as another plate system. As a child plate system, it inherits the parent plate system's
category, reference plane, molded conventions, material properties, tightness, topological
boundaries, and continuity.

Child Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to create a child plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties

Opens the Child Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the plate system. The initial plate system properties default from the parent

Molded Forms User's Guide 426

 Placing Plate Systems

plate system, if there is one, or from the selected structural specification. For more
information, see Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 432).
Select Surface
Specifies an existing plate system in the model that you want to make a child plate system.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the child plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Specifies objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity

Molded Forms User's Guide 427

 Placing Plate Systems

If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.
Sketching Plane
Select the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the Boundary Curve option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 428

 Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 429

 Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.

Molded Forms User's Guide 430

 Placing Plate Systems

Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?

 Create a child plate system (on page 431)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Create a child plate system

1. Click Child Plate System command.
2. Select the parent plate system.

3. Click Define Boundaries .

4. Define the child plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
5. Click Accept .
6. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
7. Set the remaining child plate system properties.
8. Click Finish.

 The new child plate system references, but does not copy, the surface geometry of the
selected parent plate system.
 If you change the parent surface geometry, all child plate systems that reference that surface
geometry also change.

Molded Forms User's Guide 431

 Placing Plate Systems

Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf child plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 432)
Material Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 435)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the child plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 432

 Placing Plate Systems

 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate

type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 433

 Placing Plate Systems

Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid

Molded Forms User's Guide 434

 Placing Plate Systems

connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the child plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 435

 Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the child plate system that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 436

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 437

 Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 438

 Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference

Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 439

 Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 440

 Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 441

 Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 442

 Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 443

 Placing Plate Systems

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 444

 Placing Plate Systems

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 445

 Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Primary Orientation

Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 446

 Placing Plate Systems

Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions

Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Molded Forms User's Guide 447

 Placing Plate Systems

Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 448

 Placing Plate Systems

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Ruled Plate System

The Ruled Plate System command creates a plate system that is interpolated between two
non-planar curves, providing a smooth transition. You have the option of selecting existing curves
in the model or drawing the curves in the Sketch 2D environment. A common use for this
command is to place a plate system between two other plate systems that form a corner.

Ruled Plate System Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to create a ruled plate system in the model.

Ruled Plate System Properties

Opens the Ruled Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected
structural specification. For more information, see Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box
(on page 456).

Molded Forms User's Guide 449

 Placing Plate Systems

First Curve Definition

Defines the first curve of the ruled plate system. See the Define Curve Controls and Define
Plane Controls sections below.

Second Curve Definition

Defines the second curve of the ruled plate system. See the Define Curve Controls and
Define Plane Controls sections below.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part

Molded Forms User's Guide 450

 Placing Plate Systems

that is a child to the profile system.

Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Define Curve Controls

Available when you use the First Curve Definition and Second Curve Definition options.

Pick Curve
Select this option to select an existing curve in the model as a curve for a ruled plate system.
Sketch Curve
Select this option to draw a curve for the ruled plate system.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item

Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable

Molded Forms User's Guide 451

 Placing Plate Systems

Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls

Available when you use the Boundary Curve option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Define Plane Controls

Available when you use the First Curve Definition, Second Curve Definition and Boundary
Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 452

 Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 453

 Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

What do you want to do?

 Create a ruled plate system using existing curves (on page 454)
 Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves (on page 455)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Create a ruled plate system using existing curves

1. Click Ruled Plate System .

2. Click First Curve Definition .

Pick Curve is selected as the default option.

3. Select the first curve.

4. Click Second Curve Definition .

Pick Curve is selected as the default option.

5. Select the second curve.

6. Click Define Boundaries .

7. Define the ruled plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
8. Click Accept .
9. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:

Molded Forms User's Guide 454

 Placing Plate Systems

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)

10. Set the remaining plate system properties.
11. Click Finish.

Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves

1. Click Ruled Plate System .

2. Click First Curve Definition .

3. Click Sketch Curve .
4. Specify the sketching plane for the curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .

6. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Add Projection Item .

8. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

9. Click Sketch 2D .
10. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the first curve for the ruled plate system.
11. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

12. Click Second Curve Definition .

13. Click Sketch Curve .
14. Specify the sketching plane for the second curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

15. Click Add Intersecting Item .

16. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

17. Click Add Projection Item .

18. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

19. Click Sketch 2D .

Molded Forms User's Guide 455

 Placing Plate Systems

20. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the second curve for the ruled plate system.
21. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

22. Click Define Boundaries .

23. Define the ruled plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
24. Click Accept .
25. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
26. Set the remaining plate system properties.
27. Click Finish.

Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 457)
Material Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 459)
Molded Conventions Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 460)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)

Molded Forms User's Guide 456

 Placing Plate Systems

General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the ruled plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the

Molded Forms User's Guide 457

 Placing Plate Systems

plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 458

 Placing Plate Systems

Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.

Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire